Dna6392.tmp Merlin Legend R1 PBX System Planning

User Manual: Merlin Legend R1 PBX System Planning

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 264

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

AT&T

MERLIN LEGEND™
Communications System
PBX System Planning

AT&T 555-610-113
Issue 1
August 1991

Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However,
information is subject to change.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Information
For important FCC interference, registration, and repair information, see ‘Customer Support Information” in this book.

Trademarks
Accunet is a registered trademark of AT&T.
AUDIX is a registered trademark of AT&T.
Magic on Hold is a registered trademark of AT&T.
Megacom is a registered trademark of AT&T.
MERLIN is a registered trademark of AT&T.
MERLIN LEGEND is a trademark of AT&T.
MERLIN MAIL is a trademark of AT&T.
MLX-10, MLX-10D, MLX-20L, and MLX28D are trademarks of AT&T.
MultiQuest is a registered trademark of AT&T.
PagePac is a registered trademark of DRACON, a Division of Harris Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, inc.
ZoneMate is a trademark of DRACON, a Division of Harris Corporation.

Support Telephone Number
AT&T provides atoll-free customer Helpline (1-800-628-2888)24 hours a day (U.S.A. only). Call the Helpline, or your authorized
dealer, if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system.

ERRATA

MERLIN LEGEND™ Communications System
PBX System Planning
555-610-113

Ignore all references to the small processor module. The MERLIN LEGEND™ Communions
System offers only one processor module. This processor module is referred to as a large processor
module in this document.
Page 1-6
Table 1-2, Control Unit Space Requirements: Ignore the reference to a small system. The backboard

dimensions shown for a “small” system are the dimensions needed for a system with a basic carrier or a
system with basic carrierr and one expansion carrier.
Page 2-1
Under the "Processor Module" bullet: Ignore the reference to the “small” processor module.
Page 2-5

Under “Planning Form Instructions” for PBX System Form 1, System Planning, under the section “Size
of Processor Module”: AIways check the box labeled “large.”
Appendix A - Forms
PBX System Form 1, System Planning, und`er the section “Size of Processor Module”: Always check the
box labeled “large.”

October 1, 1991

Contents

Customer Support Information
Support Telephone Number
Information
■ Security
■ Warranty
■

■ FCC/DOC

About This Book
■ Related

Documentation
■ How to Order Books
■ Additional Ordering Information
■ Product Safety Labels
■ How to Comment on This Book

Preparation
■ System

Components
of the Control Unit
■ Telephone User Survey
■ Floor Plan
■ Location

Control Unit
Modules
■ System Operating Conditions
■ System Numbering
■

Trunks
■ Trunk

Connections
■ Trunk Options
■ Trunk Assignment

vii
vii
vii
xi
x i

xiii
xiv
xiv
xv
x v
x v

1-1
1-1
1-5
1-7
1-11

2-1
2-1
2-9
2-12

3-1
3-1
3-7
3-43

Contents i

Contents

Features
Telephone Features
Operator Features
Group Assigned Features
System Features

Modifications
■

Preparation

■ Adding

to the System

4-1
4-1
4-6
4-14
4-27

5-1
5-1
5-2

Forms

A-1

Index

IN-1

ii Contents

Figures

Preparation
1-1
1-2
1-3

2-4
2-5

Trunk and Station Modules
Sample Control Unit Diagram
Two-Digit Numbering Plan
Three-Digit Numbering Plan
Set Up Space Numbering Plan

2-2
2-8
2-21
2-23
2-25

Partially Completed Form 2c, System Numbering — Trunk Jacks
Sample Network Planning Map
Factory-Set Assignment, Digital/lSDN (MLX) Telephones
Factory-Set Assignment, Analog Multiline Telephones
Digital/lSDN (MLX) DLC
Analog Multiline DLC

3-5
3-32
3-45
3-46
3-49
3-49

Trunks
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6

1-2
1-8
1-12

Control Unit
2-1
2-2
2-3

System Components
Employee Communication Survey Form
Floor Plan

Features
4-1
Completed ARS Worksheet
4-2
4-3

Example One, PBX System Form 9b
Example Two, PBX System Form 9b

4-4
4-5
4-6

Subpattern Example
Extra Digit Example
Digit Absorption Example

4-42
4-47
4-48
4-51
4-53
4-55

Contents iii

Tables

Preparation
1-1

Environmental Requirements

1-2
1-3

Control Unit Space Requirements
Employee Communication Survey — Sample Analysis

Control Unit
2-1
2-2

2-3

Trunk Jack Types
Coding Trunk Type
Services on the DS1 Facility
Line Compensation Settings
Timers and Counters
Guide to DS1 Facilities Ordering

3-2
3-3
3-17
3-21
3-28
3-35

Required Trunk and/or Station Modules
Adding New Trunks
Adding Auxiliary Equipment
Adding New Stations

5-3
5-5
5-5
5-6

PBX System Forms

A-1

Forms
A-1

iv Contents

2-4
2-13
2-15

Modifications
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4

Module Capacities
Station Jack Types
Maximum Number of Operator Positions

Trunks
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6

1-5
1-6
1-10

The exclamation point in an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
When installing telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the
risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including:
Read and understand all instructions.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on or packed with the product.
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in a wet location unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone wiring has been
disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Use only AT&T-manufactured MERLIN LEGEND™ circuit modules, carrier assemblies, and power units
in the MERLIN LEGEND (511A) control unit.
Use only AT&T-recommended/approved MERLIN LEGEND accessories.
If equipment connected to the analog station modules (008/408/408 GS/LS) or to the MLX telephone
module (008 MLX) is to be used for in-range out-of-building (IROB) applications, IROB protectors are
required.
Do not install this product near water, for example, in a wet basement location.
Do not overload wall outlets as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
The MERLIN LEGEND is equipped with a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will fit only into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If
you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace the obsolete outlet.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding plug.
The MERLIN LEGEND system requires a supplementary ground.
Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces. Do not allow anything to rest on the power
cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it.
Slots and openings in the module housings are provided for ventilation. To protect this equipment from
overheating, do not block these openings.
Never push objects of any kind into this product through module openings or expansion slots, as they
may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts, which could result in a risk of fire or electric
shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on this product.
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners on this
product. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

Customer Support Information

Support Telephone Number
AT&T provides a toll-free customer Helpline (1-800-628-2888) 24 hours a day (U.S.A. only). Call the Helpline, or your authorized
dealer, if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Electromagnetic Interference Information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated
in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.

Canadian Department of Communications (DOC)
Interference Information
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of
the Canadian Department of Communications.
Le Pr6sent Appareil Numerique, n’emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant Ies Iimites applicable aux apparails
numeriques de la class A prescribes clans Ie reglement sur Ie brouillage radioelectrique edicte par Ie ministere des
Communications du Canada.

FCC Notification and Repair Information
This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its rules. In compliance with those rules, you are
advised of the following:
■

Means of Connection. Connection of this equipment to the telephone network shall be through a standard network interface
jack: USOC RJ11C, RJ14C, RJ21X. Connection to E&M tie trunks requires a USOC RJ2GX. Connection to off-premises
stations requires a USOC RJ11C or RJ14C. Connection to 1.544 Mbs digital facilities must be through a USOC RJ48C or
RJ48X. Connection to DID requires a RJ11 C, RJ14C or RJ21X. These USOCs must be ordered from your telephone
company.
This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines.

■

Notification to the Telephone Companies. Before connecting this equipment, you or your equipment supplier must notify
your local telephone company’s business office of the following:
■

The telephone number(s) you will be using with this equipment.

■

The appropriate registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN), which can be found on the back or bottom of
the control unit, is as follows:
If this equipment is to be used as Key System, report the following number AS593M-72914-KF-E, and if the system
provides both manual and automatic selection of incoming/outgoing access to the network, report AS593M-72682MF-E. The ringer equivalence number for both systems is 1.5A.

■

For tie line connection, provide the telephone company the facility interface code (FIC) of TL31M and the service order
code (SOC) 9. OF.

Customer Support Information vii

Customer Support Information

■

For connection to off-premises stations, report the FIC OL 13C and SOC 9. OF.

■

If this equipment is to be connected to digital service (1 .544 Mbs), the FIC is 04DU9-B for D4 framing format or 04DU9-C
for extended framing format, and SOC 6.OP.

■

If this equipment is to be connected to DID facilities, the FIC is 02RV2-T, and the SOC is 9. OF.

■

The quantities and USOC numbers of the jacks required.

■

For each jack, provide the sequence in which lines are to be connected: the type lines, the FIC, and REN by position
when applicable.

You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the line(s).
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which maybe connected to the telephone line. Excessive REN’s on the
telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all, areas the sum of the
REN’s should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that maybe connected to the line, as determined
by the total REN’s, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
Installation and Operational Procedures
The manuals for your system contain information about installation and operational procedures.
■

Repair Instructions. If YOU experience trouble because your equipment is malfunctioning, the FCC requires that the
equipment not be used and that it be disconnected from the network until the problem has been corrected. Repairs to this
equipment can be made only by the manufacturers, their authorized agents, or by others who maybe authorized by the FCC.
In the event repairs are needed on this equipment, please contact the National Service Assistance Center (NSAC) at 1-600626-2666, or your authorized AT&T dealer.

■

Rights of the Local Telephone Company. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the local telephone
company may discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance. But if advance notice is not
practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will also be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that affect the
proper functioning of this equipment. If they do, you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain
uninterrupted telephone service.

■

Hearing Aid Compatibility. The custom telephone sets for this system are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids
as prescribed by the FCC.

■

Automatic Dialers. WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO EMERGENCY
NUMBERS:
■

Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call.

■

Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.

DOC Notification and Repair Information
NOTICE: The Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that
the equipment meets meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. The DOC does not
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to connect it to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases,
the company’s inside wiring for single-line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly
(telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent
degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any
repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or any equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications
company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.

Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and
internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric
inspection authority or electrician, as appropriate.

viii Customer Support Information

Customer Support Information

To prevent overloading, the Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be
connected to a telephone loop used by the device. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject
only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100.
DOC Certification No. 230 4095A
CSA Certification No. LR 56260
Load No. 6

Renseignements sur la notification du ministere des Communications du Canada et la reparation
AVIS: L’etiquette du ministere des Communications du Canada identifie Ie materiel homologue. Cette etiquette certifie que Ie
materiel est conforme a certiaines normes de protection, d’exploitation et de securite des reseaux de telecommunications. Le
ministere n’assure toutefois pas que le materiel fonctionnera a la satisfaction de I’utilisateur.
Avant d’installer ce materiel, I’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est permis de Ie raccorder aux installations de I’entreprise locale de
telecommunication. Le materiel doit egalement etre installe en suivant une methode acceptee de raccordement. Dans certains
cas, Ies fils interieurs de I’enterprise utilises pour un service individual a Iigne unique peuvent etre prolonges au moyen d’un
dispositif homologue de raccordement (cordon prolongateur telephonique interne). L’abonne ne doit pas oublier qu’il est
possible que la conformite aux conditions enone6es ci-dessus n’empechent pas la degradation du service clans certaines
situations. Actuellement, Ies entreprises de telecommunication ne permettent pas que l’on raccorde leur materiel a des jacks
d’abonne, sauf dans Ies cas precis prevus par Ies tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises.
Les reparations de materiel homologue doivent etre effectuees par un centre d’entretien canadien autorise designe par Ie
fournisseur. La compagnie de telecommunications peut demander a I’utilisateur de debrancher un appareil a la suite de
reparations ou de modifications effectutees par I’utilisateur ou a cause de mauvais fonctionnement.
Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer que tous Ies fils de mise a la terre de la source d’energie electrique, des
Iignes telephoniques et des canalisations d’eau metalliques, s’il y en a, sent raccordes ensemble. Cette precaution est
particulierement importance clans les regions rurales.
AVERTISSEMENT L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-meme; il doit avoir recours a un service
d’inspection des installations electriques, ou a un electrician, selon Ie cas.
L’indite de charge (IC) assigne a chaque dispositif terminal indique, pour eviter toute surchage, Ie pourcentage de la charge
totale qui peut etre raccordee a un circuit telephonique boucle utilise par ce dispositif. La terminaison du circuit boucle peut etre
constitute de n’importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs, pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de I’ensemble des
dispositifs ne depasse pas 100.
No d’homologation 230 4095A
Node certification CSA: LR 56260
L’indite de charge: 6

Customer Support Information ix

Customer Support Information

x Customer Support Information

Customer Support Information

Security of Your System—Preventing Toll Fraud
As a customer of a new telephone system, you should be aware that there exists an increasing problem of telephone toll fraud.
Telephone toll fraud can occur in many forms, despite the numerous efforts of telephone companies and telephone equipment
manufacturers to control it. Some individuals use electronic devices to prevent or falsify records of these calls. Others charge
calls to someone else’s number by illegally using lost or stolen calling cards, billing innocent parties, clipping on to someone
else’s line, and breaking into someone else’s telephone equipment physically or electronically. In certain instances, unauthorized
individuals make connections to the telephone network through the use of remote access features.
The Remote Access feature of your system, if you choose to utilize it, permits off-premises callers to access the system from a
remote telephone by using an 800 number or a 7- or 10- digit telephone number. The system returns an acknowledgement
signaling the user to key in his or her authorization code, which is selected and administered by the system manager. After the
authorization code is accepted, the system returns dial tone to the user. If you do not program specific egress restrictions, the
user will be able to place any call normally dialed from a telephone associated with the system. Such an off-premises network
call is originated at, and will be billed from, the system location.
The Remote Access feature, as designed, helps the customer, through proper administration, to minimize the ability of
unauthorized persons to gain access to the network. Most commonly, phone numbers and codes are compromised when
overheard in a public location, through theft of a wallet or purse containing access information, or through carelessness (writing
codes on a piece of paper and improperly discarding it). Additionally, hackers may use a computer to “dial” an access code and
then publish the information to other hackers. Enormous charges can be run up quickly. It is the customer’s responsibility to take
the appropriate steps to properly implement the features, evaluate and administer the various restriction levels, protect access
codes, and distribute access codes only to individuals who have been fully advised of the sensitive nature of the access
information.
Common carriers are required by law to collect their tariffed charges. While these charges are fraudulent charges made by
persons with criminal intent, applicable tariffs state that the customer of record is responsible for payment of all long-distance or
other network charges. AT&T cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for
charges that result from unauthorized access.
To minimize the risk of unauthorized access to your communications system:
Use a nonpublished Remote Access number.
Assign authorization codes randomly to users on a “need-to-have” basis, keeping a log of ALL authorized users and
assigning one code to one person.
Use random sequence authorization codes, which are less likely to be easily broken.
Deactivate all unassigned codes promptly.
Ensure that Remote Access users are aware of their responsibility to keep the telephone number and any authorization codes
secure.
When possible, restrict the off-network capability of off-premises callers, via use of Call Restrictions and Disallowed List
capabilities.
When possible, block out-of-hours calling.
Frequently monitor system call detail reports for quicker detection of any unauthorized or abnormal calling patterns.
Limit Remote Call Forward to persons on a “need-to-have” basis.

Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability
Limited Warranty
AT&T warrants to you, the customer, that your MERLIN LEGEND Communications System will be in good working order on the
date AT&T or its authorized reseller delivers or installs the system, whichever is later (“Warranty Date”). If you notify AT&T or its
authorized reseller within one year of the Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order, AT&T will without charge
to you repair or replace, at its option, the system components that are not in good working order. Repair or replacement parts
may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis. If AT&T determines that your system cannot be repaired
or replaced, AT&T will remove the system and, at your option, refund the purchase price of your system, or apply the purchase
price towards the purchase of another AT&T system.

Customer Support Information xi

Customer Support Information

If you purchased your system directly from AT&T, AT&T will perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and conditions
of the specific type of AT&T maintenance coverage you selected. A written explanation of AT&T’s types of maintenance
coverage may be obtained from AT&T by calling 1-800-247-7000. If you purchased your system from an AT&T authorized
reseller, contact your reseller for the details of the maintenance plan applicable to your system.
This AT&T limited warranty covers damage to the system caused by power surges; including power surges due to lightning.
The following will not be deemed to impair the good working order of the system, and AT&T will not be responsible under this
limited warranty for damages resulting from
■ failure

to follow AT&T’s installation, operation, or maintenance instructions

■ unauthorized

system modification, movement, or alteration

■ unauthorized

use of common carrier communication services accessed through the system

■ abuse,
■

misuse, or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and persons under the customer’s control

acts of third parties and acts of God

AT&T’S OBLIGATION TO REPAIR, REPLACE, OR REFUND AS SET FORTH ABOVE IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE, AT&T, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, AND AUTHORIZED RESELLERS MAKE
NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABlLlTY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
EXCEPT FOR PERSONAL INJURY, DIRECT DAMAGES TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY PROXIMATELY CAUSED BY
AT&T, AND LIABILlTY OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY ASSUMED IN A WRllTEN AGREEMENT SIGNED BY AT&T, THE LIABILITY OF
AT&T, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS AND AUTHORIZED RESELLERS FOR ANY CLAlMS, LOSSES, DAMAGES OR EXPENSES
FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING ACTS OR OMISSIONS OF THIRD PARTIES) REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF
ACTION, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, SHALL NOT EXCEED AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO THE LESSER OF
THE DIRECT DAMAGES PROVEN OR THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T OR ITS
AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS OR AUTHORIZED RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL, RELIANCE, CONSEQUENTLY, OR ANY
OTHER INDIRECT LOSS OR DAMAGE (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES) INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SYSTEM. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL SURVIVE FAILURE OF THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SET FORTH IN THE
LIMITED WARRANTY ABOVE.

xii Customer Support Information

About This Book

This book tells you how to plan a Hybrid/PBX communications system. It is
intended for persons who plan, implement, coordinate, and manage the system
(called system managers).
In addition to this book, you will need
■

copies of the PBX System Planning Forms
You will use these forms to
■

outline the decisions you make about how the system should be
assembled and programmed—for example, what trunks will be
connected to the control unit and in what order.

■

program the system following the form information. These forms are
formatted to reflect the order, or sequence, of programming and include
the category and entry titles found on the programming screens.
create an external record of your system’s configuration-its equipment,
options, and features.

■

the AT&T list of equipment ordered for the system

■

the local telephone company’s and long-distance vendor’s trunk information
lists

■

copies of the Employee Communication Survey form

■

a floor plan showing the locations of the equipment

About This Book xiii

About This Book

Related Documentation
The following kinds of documentation are available to help you set up, use, and
maintain the communications system:
reference
setup and modification
telephone user support
operator guides
miscellaneous

How to Order Books
The books needed for operating the communications system were supplied with
the system. You can order addtional copies of these and other books listed
below from the AT&T Customer Information Center:
■ Within
■ In

the continental United States, call 1-800-432-6600.

Canada, call 1-800-255-1242.

MERLIN LEGEND Book Title

Order Number

System Setup and Modification
PBX System Planning
PBX System Planning Forms only
Key System Planning
Key System Planning Forms only
Data Guide
Data Planning Forms only
System Programming

555-610-113
555-610-117
555-610-112
555-610-116
555-610-114
555-610-118
555-610-111

System Reference
System Reference

555-610-110

Telephone User Support
Analog Multiline Telephones User’s Guide
555-610-120
MLX-10D,™ MLX-28D,™ and MLX-20L™ Digits//KDN Display
Telephones User’s Guide
555-610-122
MLX-10™ Digital/ISDN Non-Display Telephone
User’s Guide
555-610-123
MLX-10™ and MLX-10D™ User Cards
555-610-124
MLX-28D™ and MLX-20L™ User Cards
555-610-125
Single-Line Telephones User’s Guide
555-610-121

xiv Related Documentation

About This Book

MERLIN LEGEND Book Title

Order Number

Operator Guides
Analog Direct-Line Consoles Operator’s Guide
Digital/ISDN Direct-Line Consoles Operator’s Guide
Digits//lSDN Queued Call Console Operator’s Guide

555-610-131
555-610-132
555-610-133

Miscellaneous
Calling Group Supervisor’s Guide

555-610-130

Additional Ordering Information
For information on ordering replacement parts, accessories, and other
equipment that is compatible with the system, see Appendix A in System
Reference.

Product Safety Labels
Throughout this book, hazardous situations are indicated by an exclamation
point inside a triangle, along with the word caution or warning:

WARNING
Warning indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or
severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided.

CAUTION
Caution indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor
personal injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided.

How to Comment on This Book
We welcome your feedback on this book. Please use the feedback form that
follows. If the form is missing, send your comments to A. Sherwood, AT&T,
99 Jefferson Road, Rm. #2A25, Parsippany, NJ 07054.

Related Documentation XV

Preparation

Several actions need to be completed before the system is installed:
■ Review

the system’s hardware, features, and operation.

■

Arrange for the location of the control unit.

■

Survey telephone users on their needs.

■

Find or create a floor plan.

System Components
To tailor the system for your company, you must know the number and types of
telephones, outside trunks, and adjuncts that were ordered. Review the AT&T
Equipment List provided by your AT&T representative or authorized dealer.
If you did not participate in ordering, talk with your management about how the
equipment ordered will be used—for example, which employees will get what
telephones, which consoles operators will be using, and where adjuncts will be
located.
Figure 1-1 shows the components of a typical system. Your system may not
have all the components pictured, or it may have additional or different
components. The numbered items in the figure correspond to the descriptions
that follow.
Note: The outside lines in systems operating in the Hybrid/PBX mode are called
trunks.

System Components 1-1

Preparation

Figure 1-1 System Components

1-2 System Components

Preparation

1 . Control Unit. The backbone of the system, consisting of the basic and
expansion carriers, power supply module, processor module, and trunk and
station modules. The control unit connects telephone company trunks with
stations such as telephones and adjuncts.

2 . Trunk and Station Modules. The components that connect telephone
company trunks and terminal equipment such as telephones, external alerts,
and fax machines via jacks to the control unit.
3 . Basic Carrier. The component attached to the backboard used to hold the
modules needed for system operation. The basic carrier houses the
processor module, power supply module, and up to five trunk and station
modules. Each expansion carrier houses its own power supply module and
up to six additional trunk and/or station modules. One or two expansion
carriers can be added.
4 . Processor Module. A miniature computer that controls most of the system’s
features and supplies the system’s diagnostics. The processor module
provides two jacks, one for Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) and
the other for system programming and maintenance via a personal computer
(PC).
5 . Power Supply Module. The component that supplies DC power for the
modules and telephones (one power supply unit is needed per carrier). If the
system’s power requirements exceed the capacity of the power supply
module, an auxiliary power supply unit can be added.
6 . Direct Station Selector (DSS). A console that adds 50 buttons for one-touch
extension dialing to the MIX-20L™ or MLX-28D™ telephone and speeds call
handling.
7 . Analog Data Terminal. A data terminal such as a PC, printer, or optical
reader that connects via a modem (for transmitting and receiving analog
signals) to a 012 basic telephone module or a 008 OPT module. A data
terminal can also be connected to an MLX telephone using a Multi-Function
Module (MFM) or to an analog multiline telephone using a General Purpose
Adapter (GPA.)
®
8 . Magic on Hold . Optional equipment that connects to the system through a
GS/LS jack programmed for Music-on-Hold. (A customer-provided music
source can be connected instead of Magic on Hold.)

9 . General Purpose Adapter (GPA). An adapter used to connect a variety of
tip/ring (T/R) adjuncts to an analog multiline telephone (shown here with an
answering machine).
10. Analog Multiline Telephone. A 34-button telephone with built-in
speakerphone that connects to the system via an analog station jack. Other
analog multiline telephones compatible with the system include the 22- and
34-button with built-in speakerphone and a one-line, 16-character display
and the 10- and 22-button with built-in speakerphone, without display.
11. MLC-5 Cordless Telephone.A cordless multiline telephone that connects to
the control unit via an analog station jack.
12. Industry-Standard Single-Line Telephone.A touch-tone or rotary industrystandard telephone connected to the system via a 012 basic telephone
module or a 008 OPT module.

System Components 1-3

Preparation

13. Off-Premises Telephone (OPT). A single-line, touch-tone or rotary, industrystandard telephone located in a different building from the control unit.
14. External Alerts. Alerting devices such as bells, chimes, and strobe lights
that connect to a jack on a 012 basic telephone module or a 008 OPT
module, or to an MFM or Supplemental Alert Adapter (SAA).
15. Digital Data Terminal. A data terminal such as a PC, printer, or optical
reader that connects via an ISDN 7500B Data Module to a 008 MLX module
and that can also include an MLX telephone.
16. MLX-20L Telephone. A digital/lSDN (MLX) telephone with 20 line buttons
and a display with seven lines of 24 characters each. The MLX-20L™
telephone can also be used as a system programming console. Other MLX
telephones include:
■ MLX-10™/MLX-10D™ Telephone. A 10-button MLX telephone with or
without a two-line, 24-character display.
■ MLX-28D™ Telephone. An MLX telephone with 28 line buttons and a
two-line, 24-character display.

17. Multi-Function Module (MFM). A circuit board mounted inside an MLX
telephone that provides a jack to connect optional equipment such as
answering machines, fax machines, external alerts, and modems to the
telephone.
18. Fax machine. Industry-standard fax machines connected to the control unit
via a jack on a 012 basic telephone module or a 008 OPT module, an MFM,
or a GPA.
19. SMDR Printer. A printer for Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call
records, connected via an RS-232 jack on the processor module.
20. Applications. Software and hardware for the MERLIN LEGEND™ Communications System that can be connected to the control unit to provide more
functions:
■
Call Accounting System (CAS)
■
Call Accounting Terminal (CAT)
■
Call Management System (CMS)
■
MERLIN MAIL™ Voice Messaging System
■
MERLIN® Attendant
■
Integrated Solution II (IS II)
■
Call Accounting System (CAS) — IS II
■
AUDIX ® Voice Power — IS II
■
Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant-lS II
■
MERLIN LEGEND System Programming and Maintenance (SPM)
21. Loudspeaker Paging System. A single-zone or multizone system such as
PagePac* with Zonemate† 9 or 39 that connects via an administered jack on
a GS/LS module.
22. AC Power Outlet. A dedicated 115-VAC wall outlet (not controlled by an
on/off switch) that supplies power to the control unit.
* PagePac is a registered trademark of Dracon, a division of Harris Corporation.
† Zonemate is a trademark of Dracon, a division of Harris Corporation.

1-4 System Components

Preparation

Location of the Control Unit
Before installation, choose a room, closet, or other area where the system
control unit can be mounted on the wall. The area must meet the environmental
requirements in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 Environmental Requirements
Distances

■

Within 25 feet of the network interface (cannot be installed
outdoors)

■

Within 1000 feet of telephones

■

Within 5 feet of a dedicated AC power outlet (1 plug
per carrier)

■

Fully loaded basic carrier:

500 Btu/hr

■

Fully loaded 2-carrier:

1000 Btu/hr

■

Fully loaded 3-carrier:

1500 Btu/hr

■

Basic carrier: 117 VAC 60 Hz±1%

160 W 3 amps

■

2-carrier:

117VAC 60 Hz±1%

320 W 6 amps

■

3-carrier:

117VAC60 Hz±1%

480 W 9 amps

■

1 properly grounded plug needed per carrier

■

Additional outlets may be needed if installing printers
and PCs.

Temperature

■

40°-104°F; 4-40C (optimum temperature 60°F; 16C)

Humidity

■

20%-80% relative humidity

Ventilation

■

Allow at least 1 inch of space on the right and left sides of

Heat
Dissipation

Power
Requirements

the control unit and 12 inches above and below the
control unit to prevent overheating.

Continued

Location of the Control Unit 1-5

Preparation

Table 1-1 Continued
■
■

AC outlet for control unit should not be switch controlled.
Plugging control unit into an outlet that can be turned
on and off by a switch can cause accidental
disconnection of the system.

■

AC outlet must be property grounded via an AC
receptacle for 3-prong plug.

■

Do not install control unit outdoors.

■

Do not place control unit near extreme heat (furnaces,
heaters, attics, or direct sunlight).
Do not expose control unit to devices that generate
electrical interference (such as arc welders or motors).
Each auxiliary power unit requires 1 outlet.

■

Do not expose control unit to moisture, corrosive
gases, dust, chemicals, spray paint, or similar material.

■

Do not place anything on top of carriers.

■

Do not install under any device that may drip fluid, such
as an air conditioner.

In addition, a 3/4-inch plywood backboard is needed to mount the system on
the wall. The dimensions depend on the number of carriers, as shown in
Table 1-2. in some areas, fire or electrical codes require a flame retardant
backboard. Check with the appropriate authorities to ensure that the proper
material is provided.
Table 1-2 Control Unit Space Requirements
Carrier

Dimensions

Basic carrier
Basic carrier + 1 expansion carrier
Basic carrier + 2 expansion carriers

14"wx23"hx12"d
25"wx23"hx12"d
37"wx23"hx12"d

Backboard

Dimensions

Small system (minimum needed)
Large system (minimum needed)

4'wx3'hx3/4"d
6'wx3’hx3/4"d

It is important that the location you select for the control unit meets all of these
specifications and that the backboard is in place before installation. If you’ve
already selected a location and changes are needed, arrange for these
changes as soon as possible before installation.

1-6 Location of the Control Unit

Preparation

Telephone User Survey
The features and calling privileges you assign to each employee’s telephone
ensure that employees get the most benefit from the system.
If you were not involved in the planning and decision-making for the system, find
out from your management and your AT&T representative or authorized dealer
what telecommunications needs were identified.
To determine calling privileges, get answers to the following questions:
■

Does management want to allow both local and toll calls to be made from
every telephone?

■

If any telephones are restricted, are there any numbers the users should be
allowed to call?

■

Are there any specific numbers (such as 900) that you want to restrict users
from calling?

■

Who, if anyone, will be given personal lines?

■

Will access to central office trunks (outside lines) be restricted to certain
employees?

■

Do any departments receive frequent special calls (such as sales and
service) so that calls should come to them directly, bypassing a system
operator?

Use the Employee Communication Survey form (see Figure 1-2) to determine
each employee’s telecommunications needs. If it is not feasible to have each
employee fill out a form, get the information you need from a knowledgeable
person in each department, section, or work group. This person should have
sufficient information and authority to make decisions about calling features and
coverage assignments for others in the department. Make the appropriate number of copies of the Employee Communication Survey
form.

Telephone User Survey 1-7

Preparation

Name

Room

Extension

Name of work group (Sales, Customer Service)
Please answer each question below.
1 . Do you regularly use any of the following outside lines? (Check any that apply)

❑
❑
❑
❑
2.

WATS
FX (foreign exchange)
Tie
None of the above or don’t know

Are your phone calls covered when you’re away from your desk?

❑ No
❑ Yes

By whom?

3. Do you cover phone calls for co-workers when they are away from their desks?

❑ No
❑ Yes

For whom?

Which of those people should have a button on your phone used
exclusively for his or her calls?

When you are unable to cover calls, it is done by

Do you share the incoming call workload with others?

❑ No
❑ Yes

With whom?

Would you say your phone use is

❑ Heavy
❑ Average
❑ Light
Figure 1-2 Employee Communication Survey Form
1-8 Telephone User Survey

Preparation

Do you have a data terminal or personaI computer at your workstation?

❑ No D

❑
❑
❑ Yes Do
❑
❑

you expect to get one within the next year?
No
Yes
you have a modem or ISDN 7500B Data Module?
No
Yes

7 . Do you use account codes for charge-back of calls?

❑ No
❑ Yes

Please list all the codes you use (attach another sheet if necessary):

Approximately how many times do you transfer calls?

Do you need to dial the same number over and over every day?

❑ No
❑ Yes

times/day

Please list these numbers:

10. Do you want to be able to pick up other people’s calls when you hear their phones ring?

❑ No
❑ Yes

Please list these people:

11. Do you want your phone number to appear on another person’s phone for screening, or covering calls, or
for other reasons?

❑ No
❑ Yes

Please list these people:

Figure 1-2 Continued

Telephone User Survey 1-9

Preparation

Use the information in Table 1-3 to interpret and analyze the results of the
employee communication survey.
Table 1-3 Employee Communication Survey — Sample Analysis
1.

Types of trunks (outside
lines) used

Indicates toll calling habits. In most cases, assigning a button for each trunk
is not necessary; the use of Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ensures that
the preferred trunk is selected.

Calls covered by someone
else (sender)

Suggests that this employee should be assigned as a sender in either
Individual or Group Coverage arrangement, particularly if calls are covered
by someone other than the operator.

Cover someone else’s calls
(receiver)

Suggests assignment as a receiver in either Individual or Group Coverage
arrangements.

Share incoming calls

identifies calling group needs.

Frequency of use

Identifies heavy and light telephone users. Heavy users may benefit from
additional System Access buttons and/or an additional System Access
Originate Only button.

6. Data needs

Identifies existing and potential data terminal and personal computer users.
See the Data Guide.

7. Use of account codes

Identifies current account codes used for charge-back of calls.

8. Frequency of transfers

Suggests that an additional System Access Originate Only button may be
required.

9 . Frequently dialed numbers

Identifies useful numbers for the System Speed Dial list.

10 . Picking up calls

Identifies need for a pickup group.

11 . Sharing lines/telephone
numbers

Identifies Shared System Access buttons and/or common personal line
appearances.

1-10 Telephone User Survey

Preparation

Floor Plan
Use a floor plan to make planning more manageable and to ensure that the
correct telephone equipment is assigned to each employee.
If your organization is moving to a new location, a floor plan may already be
prepared and you may be able to get a copy of it from your management.
Create a floor plan in two phases:
1. Indicate the location and type of telephones, adjuncts (fax, answering
machines, etc.), and data terminals.
2. When you assign extension numbers, indicate the assigned numbers on the
floor plan.
Note: In this book, telephones and associated adjuncts, such as answering
machines or data terminals, or adjuncts connected directly to the control unit,
are called stations.
Planning Instructions
1 . Use a large sheet of paper and sketch your office layout. The location of
office walls and other partitions is important when features are assigned
to telephones that must be within hearing range of each other. For
example, pickup group members must be able to hear each others'
telephones rigning.
2 . Indicate the location of each employee's telephone, other locations where
there will be a telephone (such as in a conference room), and the
locations of data terminals, PCs, and host computers. Use the symbols
shown in Figure 1-3.
3 . Indicate the tupe of telephone at each location, using an abbreviation that
includes the number of programmable buttons. For example, write
"MLX-10" at 10-button MLX telephones, "MLX-20L" at 20-button MLX
display telephones, "BIS-34" at 34-button analog multiline telephones, and
so forth.
4 . Indicate the type of adjunct at each location. Write "fax," "ans. mach."
(answering machine), "headset," or other type of adjunct beneath the
symbol.

Floor Plan 1-11

Preparation

Figure 1-3 Floor Plan
As shown in Figure 1-3, the floor plan does not need to be elaborate or to scale.
The telephone symbol should be large enough to accommodate the size of
telephone and the assigned number, and if you find it helpful, the name of the
employee.
Keep the floor plan. You will refer to it during planning and complete it (by filling
in extension numbers) when you get to “System Numbering’ in Chapter 2.

1-12 Floor Plan

Control Unit

Planning the control unit consists of deciding how to place the modules, setting
the system operating conditions, and numbering the system.

Modules
Certain modules are required for every system:
■

Processor module contains the memory that controls the system software
and features. It also contains the software and firmware that supports built-in
system diagnostics and the built-in data modem used for remote
maintenance and system programming. The processor module is offered in
two sizes:
■

The small processor module supports a maximum of 24 trunks and/or 56
stations.

■

The large processor module supports a maximum of 80 trunks and/or 144
stations.

■

Power supply module provides power to the processor module and trunk
and station modules, and to each telephone and adjunct. Each carrier in the
control unit has one power supply module.

■

Trunk and station modules contain the jacks for connecting stations and
outside trunks to the control unit. The type of jack on a module determines
the type of trunk or station that can be connected to it.

The trunk and station modules and the type(s) of jacks on each are shown in
Figure 2-1.

Modules 2-1

Control Unit

Figure 2-1 Trunk and Station Modules

2-2 Modules

Control Unit

The trunks and stations that can be connected to the jack types shown in
Figure 2-1 are described below:
1. A DS1 trunk jack connects a Digital Signal 1 (DS1) facility provided by the
telephone company. The DS1 facility can be set for either T1 or integrated
Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI) operation.
The DS1 facility programmed for T1 operation supplies 24-channel emulation
of any combination of ground-start (GS), loop-start (LS), and tie trunks. When
programmed for PRI operation, the channels are used to connect ISDN
services such as Megacom® WATS.
2. Tie-trunk jacks connect private lines from other communications systems.
3. Trunk jacks (LS) connect loop-start trunks from the telephone company.
4. (PFT) jacks connect single-line telephones that work during power failures.
Analog multiline telephones and digital/lSDN (MLX) telephones cannot be
used as power failure telephones.
5. Trunk jacks (GS/LS) connect loop-start or ground-start trunks from the
telephone company.
6. Trunk (DID) jacks connect Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks.
7. Off-premises telephone (OPT) jacks connect off-premises tip/ring equipment
such as single-line telephones, fax machines, or answering machines.
Tip/ring equipment connects directly to an outside trunk and works on a
single pair of wires.
8. Analog station jacks connect analog multiline telephones and adjuncts.
See the Data Guide for more information
on data stations

9. Digital station jacks connect MLX telephones or data devices such as the
ISDN 7500B Data Module.
10. Basic telephone station jacks connect tip/ring equipment such as single-line
telephones, fax machines, or answering machines. Basic telephone station
jacks also connect optional applications such as MERLIN Attendant or
MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System for the MERLIN LEGEND
Communication System.
Table 2-1 shows the capacities of each module.

Modules 2-3

Control Unit

Table 2-1 Module Capacities
Modules

Trunk Jacks

Station Jacks

100D

1 DS1 facility (PRI or T1)

400EM

4 4-wire E&M tie trunks

400

4 LS trunks with 4 lTR*

1 PFT jack

400 GS/LS/TTR

4 GS/LS trunks with 4 lTR*

1 PFT jack

800 DID

8 DID trunks and 2 lTR*

800

8 LS trunks

2 PFT jacks

008 OPT

2 ITR*

8 OPT jacks

600 GS/LS

8 GS/LS trunks

2 PFT jacks

008

8 analog jacks

008 MLX

8 digital jacks

012

2 TTR*

12 basic jacks

408

4 LS trunks

8 analog jacks
1 PFT jack

408 GS/LS

4 GS/LS trunks

8 analog jacks
1 PFT jack

* TTR = Touch-tone receivers required for tip/ring equipment and Remote Access.

TTRs are not used to connect trunks.

2-4 Modules

Control Unit

Trunk and Station Capacity
The numbers of jacks in Table 2-1 are the physical jacks on each module. In
most cases, the number of physical jacks indicates capacity (the number of
trunks and/or stations that can be connected to the module). The exception is
the 100D module, with one physical jack, which because of the system’s
software capabilities supports 24 trunks.
Use the AT&T Equipment List (supplied with your system) to complete page
1 of PBX System Form 1, System Planning.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the section "Size of Processor Module," check the box describing the
size of the processor module (small or large).
Under the "Trunks" headin in the "Capacity" section:
1 . Fill in the number of each type of trunk module on the appropriate line.
2 . Add the column and record the result next to the system totals.
3 . Multiply the number of each type of module by the number of trunks it
supports. Write the results in the "Total Trunks by Module Type" column.
4 . Add the column and record the total tyrunk capacity of the system.
Station capacity is the number of stations that can be connected to the control
unit, and it equals the number of physical jacks on the trunk and station
modules.
See "System Numbering” in this chapter
for detailed information.

One extension number is automatically assigned to each station jack, whether or
not equipment is connected to it, except for the 008 Ml-)( and 008 OPT modules:
■

008 MLX module has two extension numbers assigned to each physical
jack, the first for a digital/lSDN (MLX) telephone and the second for any
equipment connected to the telephone through an MFM.

■

008 OPT module has eight physical jacks, which the system reads as 12
jacks and assigns an extension number to each.

Planning Form Instructions
Under the heading "Stations":
1.

Fill in the numbers of each type of station module on the appropriate
lines.

Add the column and record the result by System Totals.

Multiply the number of each type of module by the number of physical
jacks on it and record the results.

Add the column and fill in the "System Totals" line to show station
capacity.

Modules 2-5

Control Unit

Planning Form Instructions - Continued
To determine the number of extensions assigned:
5. Multiply the number of physiocal jacks by module type by the number of
station extensions the system assigns to each module's jack type.
N O T E : Since the system assigns an additional four extensions to each 008
OPT module you must multiply the number of 008 OPT modules by four
and add this subtotal to the result shown in the "Physical Jacks by Module
Type" column.
6. Write the results in the "Total Station Extension Assigned" column.
7. Add the column and fill in the "System Totals" line.

Module Placement
Use the “Control Unit Diagram” on PBX System Form 1 and the following
guidelines to plan where the modules are placed in the control unit:
■ Put
■
■

the power supply module in the far left slot of each carrier.

Put the processor module in slot 00 of the basic carrier.
Put trunk and station modules in any order in slots 01 through 17, with the

following conditions:
Put the modules in each carrier from left to right with no empty slots

between modules. (The system does not acknowledge modules in slots
that follow an empty slot; slots to the right of the last module can be left
empty.)
See “Station Jack Connections” in this
chapter for information on QCCs

If the system includes a queued call console (QCC), make the 008 MLX
module the first station module (located to the left of any 008, 408, or 408
GS/LS modules).
Put all 012 and 008 OPT modules in the same carrier whenever possible
(These modules use a frequency generator.)
Group all 800 DID, 100D, and 400EM modules together according to
type, whenever possible, to save time in system programming.
Each physical jack on the control unit is numbered sequentially from left to right
and bottom to top:
■ Station
■ Trunk

jacks are numbered from 1 to 144.

jacks are numbered from 1 to 80.

This sequence of numbers is called the “logical ID.” It is the basis for how you
connect components to the control unit, as well as how the system assigns
station extension numbers and trunk numbers.

2-6 Modules

Control Unit

Notes:
■

Each 100D module is assigned 24 logical IDs even though the module has
only one physical trunk jack.
The 008 OPT module is assigned 12 logical IDs even though the module has

■

only eight physical station jacks.
■

Power failure transfer (PFT) jacks are not assigned logical IDs.

Planning Form Instructions
Mark the module placement on the "Control Unit Diagram" on the back of
Form 1.

1 . Write the type of module to be installed at the top of each slot. Use the
labels listed in Tabvle 2-1 (008 MLX, 408, etc.).

2 . Write the type of jack (S=station, T=trunk) and the associated logical ID
for each trunk and station jack on each module.
Note:
■

The "Unit Load" block above the diagram are reserved for occasions
when equipment changes or maintenance require the installation
technician to manually compute the values. See System Reference for
details on computing unit loads.

■

Logical ID labels for each trunk and station jack are provided with the system.
When the control unit is assembled, the labels are attached to the modules.

Figure 2-2 shows a completed ‘Control Unit Diagram” for a system with a large
processor module with 32 trunks and 52 stations.

Modules 2-7

Control Unit

Figure 2-2 Sample Control Unit Diagram

2-8 Modules

Control Unit

System Operating Conditions
Record the following system operating conditions:
programming equipment that will be used and its station jack assignment

mode of operation
whether Automatic Maintenance Busy is enabled
a reminder to set the system time and date
Use the “Control Unit Diagram” on PBX System Form 1 as a reference and
mark the “System Operating Conditions” section of that form.

Programming Equipment and Station Jack Assignment
Two types of equipment can be used for system programming:
■

an MLX-20L telephone acting as a system programming console. The
telephone is the first (lowest) station jack on the first MLX module and is
factory set for system programming.

■

a personal computer (PC) with MERLIN LEGEND System Programming and
Maintenance (SPM) software. (Both DOS- and UNIX†-based SPM are
available.) The PC is connected to the lower jack on the processor module.

Planning Form Instructions
Under the heading, "System Programming Console," on Form 1:
1 . Do one of the following:
■

Check "No" if you are using a PC with SPM to program the system. Go to
the "Mode of Operation" instructions.

■

Enter the Logical ID and Extension Number if you are using a system
programming console.

2 . To change the factory-set system programming jack, write in the new
logical ID (using the information from the "Control Unit Diagram").
Note: You will fill in the extension number of the jack later.
In addition to being factory set for system programming, the first (lowest) station
jack on the first MLX module is also factory set as the primary operator position.
Since the primary operator position cannot be reassigned to another station
jack, you may want to change the system programming assignment to ensure
that future programming sessions do not interfere with the operator’s work.
If you want the system programming jack to be different from that of a system
operator, change the programming assignment to any one of station jacks 2
through 5 on the first MLX module in the control unit.

† UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.

System Operating Conditions 2-9

Control Unit

Mode of Operation
See System Reference for more
information on modes.

Your system is registered with the FCC to operate as either a Private Branch
Exchange (PBX) or Hybrid system. However, you can program the system to
operate in any of three modes:
■

Hybrid/PBX

■ Key
■

(the factory setting)

Behind Switch

The mode of operation determines
■ how

outside trunks are provided to users

■ the

types of operator consoles allowed

■ the

features available and how they work

Note: This book applies only to systems in the Hybrid/PBX mode. To plan a
system in either the Key or Behind Switch mode, use Key System P/arming.

Hybrid/PBX Mode
See System Reference for information
on trunk types.

The Hybrid/PBX mode handles large volumes of calls and telephone users, and
offers the most flexibility of the three modes. Outside lines, called trunks, can be
loop-start, ground-start, Direct Inward Dial (DID), DS1, or tie. The outside trunks
can be grouped in pools for shared use. In addition, outside trunks can also be
assigned to line buttons on multiline telephones for users who require a personal
line.
Users access inside lines and outside trunks via System Access buttons. To
make an outside call, the user enters a dial-out code, usually a 9, and the
system automatically selects an available trunk. The Automatic Route Selection
feature determines which trunk is used for each type of outgoing call.
Incoming calls can be handled by either a direct-line console (DLC) or a queued
call console (QCC), or a combination of both. Calls handled by QCCs are
directed to a QCC queue, where they are held until an operator is available.
Planning Form Instructions
Check "Hybrid/PBX" under the "Set System Mode" heading on Form 1.

2-10 System Operating Conditions

Control Unit

Automatic Maintenance Busy
Automatic Maintenance Busy puts a malfunctioning trunk in a “maintenance
busy” state, preventing outgoing calls on that trunk. Incoming calls are never
blocked. A trunk in maintenance busy is tested by the internal maintenance
software to try to put it back into service.
The factory setting for Automatic Maintenance Busy is “disabled,” which means
that faulty trunks are not automatically put in a maintenance busy state. If you
`pIan to group trunks into pools, enable Automatic Maintenance Busy for
optimum system performance.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Automatic Maintenance Busy" heading of Form 1:
1 . Check "Disable" to keep the factory setting.
2.

Check the second box to enable Automatice Maintenance Busy.

System Date and Time
See “System Features” in Chapter 4 for
information on SMDR.

The system date and time is the month, day, year, and time shown on display
telephones and Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) reports. The system
date and time is also shown on error reports used by AT&T or an authorized
representative for maintenance.
Planning Form Instructions
Check "Yes" under the "Set System Date" and "Set System Time" headings on
Form 1 as a reminder to set the current date and time.

System Operating Conditions 2-11

Control Unit

System Numbering
System numbering is the process of assigning extension numbers to stations
(telephones and adjuncts), calling groups, paging groups, park zones, and
remote access.
The instructions in this chapter deal only with assigning extension numbers to
stations.
Number the stations in two stages:
Stage One. Decide in what order to connect the telephones and other
equipment to the control unit. To do this, identify station jack types and match
individual components with the jacks that support them.
When the system is turned on, it identifies the type of module installed in each
control unit slot and automatically assigns extension numbers to the
components in exactly the same order in which they are connected to the
control unit. As you plan connections, therefore, you should be aware of the
relationship between the jack’s logical ID and the extension number the system
assigns.
The stations are assigned 2-digit extension numbers starting with extension 10
at the station jack with the logical ID of 1. If a user needs a specific extension
number, it is simpler (in terms of programming) to connect that user’s telephone
to the station jack that is automatically assigned the requested extension
number.
Stage Two. Decide if the system-assigned extension numbers are appropriate
or if you should renumber all, or some, of the extensions assigned. to the
stations.
The system offers three predetermined numbering plans. In addition, you have
the option of creating your own unique numbering plan with extensions of one to
four digits.

Planning Form Instructions
Locate and review your Floor Plan and AT&T Equipment List to verify the
equipment you have and how many of each kind of connection are needed.
Record equipment connections and extension numbers on PBX System
Form 2a, System Numbering - Station Jacks.
Note: Form 2a is a multipage listing that accommodates entries for up to
144 stations. It shows the logical IDs for each station as well as the three
predetermined numbering plans available.
you also need PBX System Form 1, System Planning, for both reference
and to make additional entries.

2-12 System Numbering

Control Unit

Station Jack Connections
Planning station jack connections consists of identifying the jack types and
matching the telephones and other equipment to the jacks that support them.
Determine the station jack types in the control unit and plan connections in the
following order:
primary operator position
additional operator positions
Voice Announce to Busy and/or Simultaneous Voice and Data
digits!/lSDN (MIX) telephones
analog multiline telephones
tip/ring equipment
applications

Station Jack Types

Station jack type is determined by the module type. The station jack types and
the equipment that can be connected to these jacks are listed in Table 2-2.
Use the completed “Control Unit Diagram” (Form 1) and Table 2-2 for
reference and mark the station jack types on Form 2a.
Table 2-2 Station Jack Types
Station
Jack Type

Module
Type

Analog

008
408
408 GS/LS
008 MLX

Digital

Basic
Telephone

Used to Correct
Analog multiline telephones
Call Management System (CMS)

Digital/lSDN (MLX) telephones
Digital data devices, such as ISDN 7500B
Data Modules

012

Tip/ring equipment:
Single-line telephones
Adjuncts, such as answering or fax
machines
Analog data devices, such as modems
Optional applications:
MERLIN Attendant
MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System
AUDIX Voice Power—lS II
Integrated Voice Power Automated
Attendant-lS II

008 OPT

Tip/ring equipment in another building or offpremises

.
System Numbering 2-13

Control Unit

Planning Form Instructions
In the "Jack Type" column of Form 2a, indicate the type of each station jack
next to its logical ID.

Jacks for Primary Operator
Position

Check "A" if the jack is analog, "D" if digital, or "B" if basic telephone.

The system reserves 12 logical IDs for the 008 OPT module even though
only 8 are used. Cross off the last 4 logical IDs (they cannot be used).

The factory setting for the primary operator position is the lowest station jack on
the first 008 MLX module. If the system doesn’t have an Ml-x module, it’s the
lowest station jack on the first module with analog station jacks. The factory
setting for the primary operator position cannot be changed.
Two types of operator consoles can be used in the primary operator position:
■

Direct-Line Console (DLC). Trunks are assigned on individual buttons; the
console can have several calls ringing simultaneously. DLCs can be
assigned to either a digital or analog station jack.

■

Queued Call Console (QCC). Incoming calls are held in a queue and are
directed to each QCC in sequence, one at a time. QCCs can be assigned
only to digital station jacks, and the MLX-20L is the only phone that can be
used as a QCC.

If the system includes QCCs, the primary operator position must be a QCC.
Planning Form Instructions
Mark jack assignments on Form 2a.
If the system does not include a system programming console, go to step 4.
1 . See the "System Operating Conditions" section on the back Form 1 for
the logical ID of the station jack for the system programming console.
2 . Mark the "Logical ID" column of Form 2a by writing "SPC" beside the
preprinted logical ID for the system programming console station jack.
3.

Write the name of the person who will be programming the system or the
location of the system programming console in the "Person, Location, or
Function" column.

If the system does not have QCCs, go to step 6.

2-14 System Numbering

Locate the first station jack showing a "D" (digital) type. Write "QCC"
beside the preprinted lofical ID to indicate the primary QCC operator
position.

Write the name or location of the primary QCC operator in the "Person,
Location, or Function" column. Go to the "Jacks for Additional Operator
Positions" instructions.

Control Unit

Planning Form instructions - Continued
If the system includes only DLCs.

Jacks for Additional
Operator Positions

Locate the first station jack showing a "D" (digital) or "A" (analog) type.
Write "DLC" beside the preprinted logical ID to indicate the primary DLC
operator position.

Write the name or location of the primary DLC operator in the "Person,
Location, or Function" column.

Use these instructions only if the system has more than one operator
position.
The maximum numbers of both types of operator position are shown
in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 Maximum Number of Operator Positions
Maximum
Positions

Positon Type

Telephone
Type

Processor
Module Size

QCC

MLX-20L

Small or Large

DLC

MLX-20L
MLX-28D

Small

DLC

MLX-20L
MLX-28D

Large

DLC

Analog multiline
telephones

Small or Large

Any combination of operator positions can be assigned as long as no more than
four are QCCs and the total combined number is no more than six for a small
processor module or eight for a large processor module. For example, a system
with a small processor can have a combination that consists of four QCCs and
two DLCs. Or, a system with a large processor can have a combination that
consists of four QCCs, two digital/lSDN DLCs, and two analog DLCs.
Operator positions can be assigned as follows:
Assign QCC positions to only the first and fifth station jacks on a digital
module.
Assign DLCs to only the first and fifth station jacks on a digital or analog
module. This includes DLC positions used for calling group supervisors and
for the optional Call Management System (CMS).
The CMS equipment is connected to analog station jacks that are assigned
as DLC positions. You must assign two DLC positions for each CMS (a
maximum of two) connected to the system.

System Numbering 2-15

Control Unit

Planning Form Instructions
Use the "Control Unit Diagram" on Form 1 to determine which station jacks
can be used as operator positions:
1.

Circle the first and fifth station jacks on each digital or analog module on
the "Control Unit Diagram" until you have reached the maximym eaight
positions.

Mark the station jacks to be used as additional operator positions on
Form 2a.

If the system does not have QCCs, go to step 5.
3.

Write the "QCC" beside the preprinted logical ID for each additional QCC
position. Be sure to assign QCCs to only the first and fifth station jacks on
each digital module.

Write the name or location of each additional QCC operator in the
"Person, Location, or Function" column.

5 . Write "DLC" beside the preprinted logical ID for each additional DLC
position. Be sure to assign DLCs to only the first and fifth station jacks on
each digital or analog module.

Station Jack Pairs

Write the name or location of each additional DLC operator in the "Person,
Location, or Function" column.

If the system includes Call Management System(s), write "CMS" in the
"Person, Location, or Function" column next to the logical ID for the two
DLC positions assigned for each CMS.

Use these instructions only if the system has analog multiline telephones.
Two of the optional features for analog multiline telephones require an additional
station jack:
Voice Announce to Busy. A user whose telephone has this feature can hear

an announcement through the speaker even though he or she is on a call.
(MLX telephones can also use this feature but do not need an additional
station jack. Single-line telephones cannot use this feature since they do not
have speakers.)
Simultaneous Voice and Data. A user whose telephone has this feature can

use the telephone and a data terminal at the same time. (MLX telephones
have this feature without requiring a second station jack.)
An analog muitiline telephone with either one of these features requires two
consecutive analog station jacks on the control unit. The jacks are an oddnumbered analog station jack and the next higher (even-numbered) analog
station jack.

2-16 System Numbering

Control Unit

The system assigns individual extension numbers to each of the jacks for either
the Voice Announce to Busy or the Simultaneous Voice and Data feature. The
extension number associated with the first (odd-numbered) station jack in the
pair is the telephone’s extension number. Calls cannot be placed to the
extension number associated with the even-numbered station jack.
You can assign either of these features to any of the analog multiline telephones
in the system, but you cannot assign both to the same telephone.
Planning Form Instructions
On Form 2a, mark the pairs of jacks for analog multiline telephones that have
the Voice Announce to Busy or Simultaneous Vioce and Data feature.
1 . In the "Logical ID" column, draw a box around the pair of station jack
numbers that you plan to assign to each analog multiline station with
either feature.

Jacks for Digital/ISDN
(MLX) Telephones

Use the instructions in the Data Guide
to plan connections for digital data
equipment.

2 .

In the "Person, Location, or Function" column, next to the first (odd)
number of each boxed pair, identify the station by person or location.

3 .

In the "Person, Location, or Function" column, next to the second (even)
number of each boxed pair, write "voice/voice" for the Voice Announce to
Busy feature or "voice/data" for the Simultaneous Voice and Data feature.

Use these instructions only if the system has non-operatorMLX telephones
to assign to digital station jacks on 008MLX modules.
Although only one logical ID is assigned to each digital station jack, the system
assigns two extension numbers. The extension number on Form 2a is the
extension number automatically assigned to an MLX telephone connected to the
digital station jack. The second extension number is reserved for an adjunct
such as an answering machine that may be connected to the MLX telephone via
a Multi-Function Module (MFM) or for an ISDN 7500B Data Module used to
connect a data terminal.
The system automatically assigns both extension numbers whether or not the
station includes an MFM or data module. Calls can be placed to both extension
numbers independently.
The MFM can operate as either a Supplemental Alert Adapter (SAA) or as a
tip/ring interface. The adapter is used when the MFM connects an external alert
such as a bell or horn. The tip/ring interface is used when the MFM connects a
tip/ring device such as an answering machine or modem.

System Numbering 2-17

Control Unit

Planning Form Instructions
Use the Floor Plan and AT&T Equipment List to verify that you have
located all remaining MLX telephones and adjunts connected to them.
On Form 2a, mark the station jack assignments for the remaining MLX
telephones.
1.

In the "Jack Type" column, make sure there is a "D" checked next to the

In the "Person, Location, or Function: column, identify each MLX

Use the information from Form 2a as you mark the difital station adjuncts on
PBX System Form 2b, System Numbering - Digital/ISDN Station
Adjuncts.
3.

In the "Logical ID" column, write the logical ID of each digital station jack
(D jack type).
Note: You will fill in the "Factory-Set Extension No." column later.

Complete the "MFM" and "7500B" columns.
4.

If the jack does not have an adjunct connected, write "None" across the
columns.

If an adjunct is connected to the MLX telephone:
■

6.
7.

Jacks for Analog Multiline
Telephones

Check "SAA" or "T/R" in the "MFM" column to show how the MFM
connects the adjunct.

■
Check the "7500B" column if the station includes the data module.
Complete the last column.

Identify each adjunct or data module by type and by person, location, or
function.

Use these instructions only if the system includes the 408,408 GS/LS, or
008 modules.
Assign analog station jacks for all remaining non-operator analog multiline
telephones in the system.
Planning Form Instructions
On Form 2a, mark the station jack assignments for the remaining analog
multiline telephones:
1 . In the "Jack Type" column, make sure there is an "A" checked next to the
logical ID for each analog station jack.
2 . In the "Person, Location, or Function" column, identify each analog
multiline telephone by person, location, or function.

2-18 System Numbering

Control Unit

Jacks for Tip/Ring
Equipment and
Applications

See System Reference for more
information on applications.

Use these instructions only if the system includes 012 or 008 OPT modules.
Assign the basic telephone jacks on the 012 or 008 OPT modules to any tip/ring
equipment such as single-line telephones, fax machines, or answering
machines. Tip/ring equipment connects directly to an outside trunk and works
on a single pair of wires. When connected to a 008 OPT module, the tip/ring
equipment can be located off premises.
Several optional applications, if used with the system, require a basic jack on a
012 module: MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System, MERLIN Attendant,
AUDIX Voice Power—lS II, and Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant—
IS Il.
Up to four applications can be connected to the system using the same 012
module. If there are four applications, the module must be used exclusively
for this equipment. If you have fewer than four applications connected to a 012
module, some tip/ring devices can also be connected. If possible, the module
should be used only for the application equipment.
Note: The applications discussed here do not work properly with 012 modules
manufactured for older MERLIN ® II systems. These applications must be
connected to 012 modules with the code 517C13 or 517D13 on the label on the
top of the module. Modules with the code 517A13 or 517B13 can be used to
connect only single-line telephones and do not provide the disconnect signal
required by answering machines and applications.
Planning Form Instructions
On Form 2a, mark the station jack assignments on the 012 and 008 OPT
modules:
1.

In the "Jack Type" column, make sure there is a "B" checked next to the
logical ID for each basic telephone jack.

In the "Person, Location, or Function" column, identify each tip/ring device
by person or location and by type, such as single-line telephone, fax, or
answering machine.

If the system includes optional applications, indicate the type of
application in the "Person, Location, or Function" column:
■

Write "Mail" to idicate MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System.

■

Write "MERLIN A" to indicate MERLIN Attendant.

■

Write "AVP" to indicate AUDIX Voice Power-IS II.

■

Write "IVP-AA" to indicate Integrated Voice Power Automated
Attendant-IS II.

System Numbering 2-19

Control Unit

System Renumbering
Use these instructions to decide whether to keep the factory-set extension
numbers or change them to numbers tailored to your company—for
example, extension numbers that match room numbers.
The system offers three numbering plans, as shown on Form 2a, System
Numbering — Station Jacks. Each plan allows you to renumber all or selected
extensions:
Two-Digit- designed for systems with fewer than 50 stations at businesses
that do not anticipate growth to more than 50 stations in the next one or two
years. The two-digit numbering plan is the factory setting.
Three-Digit- designed for businesses with more than 50 stations.
Set Up Space- designed for businesses that want to customize numbering
and assign 1- to 4-digit extensions that are more convenient for users. As an
example, hotels and motels may want to renumber extensions to match room
numbers and to renumber services numbers (such as Housekeeping or
Room Service) to 1-digit extension numbers.
When you reassign extension numbers, keep the following in mind:
Extension numbers can contain the digits O through 9 in any combination,
except that no extension number can begin with O. (The O is a fixed dial code
representing the primary operator.)
Extension numbers can contain one to four digits and must be unique. If you
assign an extension number with one or two digits, you cannot use those
digits as the leading digits for a longer extension number. For example, if you
assign extension numbers 1, 2, 30, and 40, you cannot use those numbers
as the first number in longer extension numbers such as 10, 200, 302, or
4052.
The system-assigned numbers in the shaded areas of the figures on the
following pages are automatically reserved. To use any of these numbers for
a different station, you must assign a new extension to the station that
already has the number you need to use.
When you reassign an extension number, the extension number vacated is
free for you to use.
Select the numbering plan that fits your needs and use the appropriate
plan-specific instructions that follow to mark Forms 2a and 2b with your
extension number assignments
Two-Digit Numbering Plan

2-20 System Numbering

The extension numbers you assign according to the factory-set two-digit
numbering plan are shown in Figure 2-3. The numbers in the figure are arranged
in blocks according to the first digit, The type of equipment or feature to which
they are assigned is shown in the block.

Control Unit

0
1
2
3
4
5
Stations
60-67

6
7
8

Main Pool
7 0
A

Operator Console (not flexible)
0
Stations
10-19
Stations
20-29
Stations
30-39
Stations
40-49
Stations
50-59
Extra Stations
6800-6885

MFM's/7500Bs
710-767
Trunks
801-880

Extra Adjuncts
6900-6985

P a g e
C a l l i n g
G r o u p
793-799
770-791, 7920-7929
P
o
o
l s
Park
B
890-899
881-888

ARS Access (Hybrid/PBXMode)/Idle LIne Access
9

Figure 2-3 Two-Digit Numbering Plan

A = 800-Listed Directory Number (QCC Queue)
B = 889—Remote Access
Each of the first 58 station jacks is assigned a 2-digit extension number
beginning with extension 10 and ending with extension number 67. The rest of
the stations (68–144) are assigned 4-digit extension numbers 6800-6885. Extra
adjuncts are assigned as extensions 6900–6985.
The extension numbers shown for MFMs/7500Bs (710–767) are reserved for
station adjuncts connected to an MLX telephone such as a data terminal
connected through an ISDN 7500B Data Module or an answering machine
connected using an MFM. The extension numbers are reserved whether or not
an adjunct is connected to the telephone.
For the first 58 digital station jacks, the actual extension number assigned to the
adjunct is the extension number assigned to the MLX telephone preceded by
a 7. For example, if the extension number assigned for an MLX telephone is 25,
the extension number assigned for the adjunct on that telephone is 725. In this
example, a call can be placed to the telephone by dialing extension 25 or to the
adjunct by dialing extension 725. If you reassign the extension number of the
telephone, the system does not automatically change the extension number of
the MFM or data module.
See the

CMS documentation for more
information on reassigning numbers for
CMS agent splits.

Note: If your system includes the Call Management System (CMS), it assigns
extension numbers to agent splits.

System Numbering 2-21

Control Unit

The unshaded areas of the two-digit numbering plan in Figure 2-3 indicate the
extension numbers available for reassignment. This means you can change
selected extension numbers to one of the available numbers, for example,
extensions 6886 through 6899. If the available numbers shown do not meet your
needs, consider the three-digit numbering plan.
Planning Form Instructions
Use Figure 2-3 as you record extension number information.
1.

If the system includes digital station adjuncts:
■

Locate PBX System Form 2b, System Numbering - Digital/ISDN
Adjuncts.

■

Write the 3-digit adjunct extension number-the extension number
from Form 2a with a 7 preceeding it-in the "Factory-Set Extension No."
column of Form 2b.

2 . If you do not need to renumber any of the factory-set extension numbers:

Three-Digit Numbering
Plan

2-22 System Numbering

■

Check the "2-Digit" box under the "Renumber System" heading on
Form 2a.

■

Go to the "Form and Floor Plan Update" instruction later in this chapter.

If you want to renumber only a few of the extension, and enough
numbers are available:
■

Check the "2-Digit" and "Selected Extension Number" boxes under the
"Renumber System" heading on Form 2a.

■

Write the new extension number(s) in the "Renumber To" column on
Form 2a and Form 2b.

■

Go to the "Form and Floor Plan Update" instructions later in this
chapter.

Figure 2-4 shows the numbers automatically assigned by the system when you
renumber with the three-digit numbering plan. The numbers in the figure are
arranged in blocks according to the first digit. The type of equipment or feature
to which they are assigned is shown in the block.

Control Unit

Operator Console (not flexible)
0
S t a t i o n s
1 0 0 - 1 9 9

0
1
2

Stations
200-243
MFMs/7500Bs
3 0 0 - 3 9 9

3
4

MFMs/7500Bs
400-443

5
6
7

Main Pooll
70

9
Figure 2-4

Trunks
801-880

C a l l i n g
G r o u p
P a g e
770-791, 7920-7929
793-799
P a r k
P o o l s
B
881-888
890-899

ARS Acces (Hybrid/PBX Mode) Idle LIne Access
9

Three-Digit Numbering Plan

A = 800—Listed Directory Number (QCC Queue)
B = 889—Remote Access
All stations are assigned a 3-digit extension number beginning with extension
100 and ending with extension 243.
The extension numbers shown for MFMs/7500Bs (300-443) are resewed for
station adjuncts connected to an MLX telephone, such as a data terminal
connected through an ISDN 7500B Data Module or an answering machine
connected using an MFM. The extension numbers are reserved whether or not
an adjunct is connected to the telephone.
The actual extension number assigned to the adjunct is the extension number
assigned to the MLX telephone increased by 200. For example, if the extension
number assigned to an MLX telephone is 125, the extension number assigned
to the adjunct on that telephone is 325. In this example, a call can be placed to
the telephone by dialing extension 125 or to the adjunct by dialing extension
325. If you reassign the extension number of the telephone, the system does not
automatically change the extension number of the MFM or data module.
See the CMS documentation for more
information on reassigning numbers for
CMS agent splits.

Note: If your system includes the Call Management System (CMS), it assigns
extension numbers to agent splits.

System Numbering 2-23

Control Unit

The unshaded areas of the three-digit numbering plan in Figure 2-4 indicate the
extension numbers available for reassignment. This means you can change the
extension number automatically assigned by the system to one of the available
numbers, for example, extension number 244 through 299. If the available
numbers shown are not adequate to meet your needs, consider the set up
space numbering plan.
Planning Form Instructions
Use Figure 2-4 as you record extension number information.
1.

If the system includes digital station adjunct:
■

Locate PBX System Form 2b, System Numbering - Digital/ISDN
Station Adjuncts.

■

Write the 3-digit extension number - the extension number from Form
2a increase by 200 (within the range of 300-443) - in the "Factory-Set
Extension No." column of Form 2b.

If you do not need to renumber any of the factory-set extension numbers:
■

Check the "3-Digit" box under the "Renumber System" heading on
Form 2a.

■

Go to the "Form and Floor Plan Update" instructions later in this
chapter.

3 . If you want to renumber only a few of the 3-digit extensions and enough
numbers are available in the three-digit numbering plan.
■ Check the "3-Digit" and "Selected Extension Numbers" boxes under the
"Renumber System" heading on Form 2a.

Set Up Space Numbering
Plan

2-24 System Numbering

■

Write the new extension number(s) in the "Renumber To" column on
both Form 2a and Form 2b.

■

Go to the "Form and Floor Plan Update" instructions later in this
chapter.

Figure 2-5 shows the numbers automatically assigned when the system is
renumbered using the set up space numbering plan. The numbers in the figure
are arranged according to the first digit. The type of equipment or feature to
which they are assigned is shown in the block.

Control Unit

Operator Console (not flexible)
0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Main Pool S t a t i o n s
7100-7243
70

MFMs/7500Bs
7300-7443
Trunks
801-880

Calling
Group
770-791, 7920-7929
P a r k
881-888

P a g e
793-799
P o o l s
890-899

ARS Access (Hybrid/PBX MOde)/Idle LIne Access
9

Figure 2-5 Set Up Space Numbering Plan

A = 800—-Listed Directory Number (QCC Queue)
B = 889--Remote Access
As shown in Figure 2-5, the system assigns extension numbers in the 7100 to
7243 range to stations. This makes numbers beginning with 1 through 6
available for use in reassigning extension numbers. These new extensions can
be from one to four digits long. The unshaded areas of the setup space
numbering plan in Figure 2-5 indicate the extension numbers available for
reassignment.
The extension numbers shown for MFMs/7500Bs (7300-7443) are reserved for
station adjuncts connected to an MLX telephone, such as a data terminal
connected through an ISDN 7500B Data Module or an answering machine
connected using an MFM. The extension numbers are reserved whether or not
an adjunct is connected to the telephone.
The actual extension number assigned to the adjunct is the extension number
assigned to the MLX telephone increased by 200. For example, if the extension
number assigned to an MLX telephone is 7125, the extension number assigned
to the adjunct on that telephone is 7325. In this example, a call can be placed to
the telephone by dialing extension 7125 or to the adjunct by dialing extension
7325. If you reassign the extension number of the telephone, the system does
not automatically change the extension number of the MFM or data module.

System Numbering 2-25

Control Unit

See the CMS documentation for more
information on reassigning numbers for
CMS on agent splits.

Note: If your system includes the Call Management System (CMS), it assigns
extension numbers to agent splits.
Planning Form Instructions
Use Figure 2-5 as you record extension number information.
1.

If the system includes digital station adjuncts:
■

Locate PBX System Form 2b, System Numbering - Digital/ISDN
Station Adjuncts.

■

Write the 4-digit extension number - the extension number from Form
2a increased by 200 (within the range 7300-7443) - in the "Factory-Set"
Extension No." column of Form 2b.

Under the "Renumber System" heading of Form 2a:
■

Check "Set Up Space."

■

Write the new extension number(s) in the "Renumber To" column on
both Form 2a and Form 2b.

Form and Floor Plan Update
Make sure that your system numbering plan decisions are recorded on all the
appropriate forms.
Planning Form Instructions
On the Floor Plan, add the extension numbeers underneath the description of
the telephones and adjuncts.
On the PBX System Form 1, System Planning, in the "System Operating
Conditions" section: if you are using a system programming console, add
the new extension number of the console in the space next to the "Ext.
No."

2-26 System Numbering

Trunks

Planning for trunks consists of deciding how to connect outside trunks to the
system, selecting options for how those trunks will work, and assigning trunks to
user stations.

Trunk Connections
Plan trunk connections by identifying trunk jack types and matching outside
trunks and auxiliary equipment to the jack types that support them.
Use the “Control Unit Diagram” on PBX System Form 1 and the local
telephone company trunk information list as you record connections on
PBX System Form 2c, System Numbering — Trunk Jacks.
Trunk Jack Types
The trunk jack type is determined by the type of module. The following table
shows the trunk jack types, the module types that contain them, and the outside
trunk or equipment they support.

Trunk Connections 3-1

Trunks

Table 3-1 Trunk Jack Types

Used to Connect

Trunk Jack Type

Module Type

Trunk Type

Equipment

Loop-start (LS)

400
800
408

■ Basic
■ Special

Music-on-Hold
Loudspeaker paging systems
Maintenance Alarm

Ground-start/Loop-start (GS/LS)

DID

purpose
—FX, WATS

400 GS/LS/TTR
800 GS/LS
408 GS/LS

■ Basic

800 DID

DID

Tie

400EM

DS1

100D

■ Special

purpose
—FX, WATS

Music-on-Hold
Loudspeaker paging systems
Maintenance Alarm

Tie
T1
ISDN-PRI

If the system has 100D (DS1) modules, keep in mind that 24 logical IDs and
associated trunk numbers are assigned to each module.
See “DSI Facility (1OOD Module)” in this
chapter for information on ISDN-PRI
services.

When the system is first set up, it automatically assigns the T1 type to the facility
connected on a 100D module. This means you can dedicate the channels for
use as T1 -type facility trunks and use the channels to emulate any combination
of loop-start, ground-start, and/or tie trunks. If this is the case, your local
telephone company supplies the telephone numbers associated with each of
the channels on the DS1 facility.
You can also connect certain digital services such as Megacom ® 800 to the
TI -type facility or change the module’s service type to ISDN Primary Rate
Interface (ISDN-PRI) to allow connection of services such as Accunet ® Switched
Digital Service.
Note: You cannot mix T1 and ISDN-PRI types of service on the same 100D
module.

3-2 Trunk Connections

Trunks

Planning Form Instructions
Review the modules marked on the "Control Unit Diagram" on Form 1.
On PBX System Form 2c, System Numbering - Trunk Jacks:
1 . Write the type of each trunk jack in the control unit in the "Jack Type"
column. Use the codes shown in Table 3-2.
For systems that include the 100D module:
2 . If the module is used only to emulate trunks:
■

Fill in the jack-type codes for those trunks (T1-GS, T1-LS or T1-Tie).

■

Write only "T1" in the "Jack Type" column for any of the channels not
used at this time.

3 . If the module is used to connect services:
■

Write "T1-Tie" in the "Jack Type" column for those T1-type module
channels where the services are assigned.

■

Write "PRI" in the "Jack Type" column for all 24 logical IDs of ISDNPRI-type modules.

TabIe 3-2 Coding Trunk Type
Jack Type Code

Trunk Type

Loop-Start

GS/LS

Ground-Start/Loop-Start

DID

Tie

T1-GS

DS1 facility used to emulate GS

T1 -LS

DS1 facility used to emulate LS

T1 -Tie

DS1 facility used to emulate tie or for digital service

PRI

DS1 facility used for lSDN-PRI service

Trunk Connections 3-3

Trunks

Jacks for Outside Trunks
Identify the specific outside trunks you want to connect to each loop-start and
ground-start/loop-start trunk jack. Connect outside trunks to a continuous
sequence of trunk jacks on the control unit, beginning with the first trunk jack
(logical ID 1). Use trunk jacks at the beginning of the sequence for basic
ground-start and/or basic loop-start trunks. Use jacks later in the sequence for
special-purpose trunks such as WATS or FX (foreign exchange).
Group trunks together according to type: basic loop-start trunks, basic
ground-start trunks, special-purpose loop-start or ground-start trunks. DID, PRI,
T1, and tie trunks are automatically grouped according to type since they
require specific types of modules. Your local telephone company supplies the
information you need to identify the specific trunks connected to each trunk jack
on each DID and tie-trunk module and each channel on each 100D module.
Planning Form instructions
On Form 2c:
1.

In the "Trunk Type" columns, write the type of trunk you plan to connect to
each trunk jack or T1 channel - basic, FX, WATS (include band), DID, tie.
(Refer to the local telephone company trunk information list.)
■

If a trunk such as WATS is only inbound or outbound (not two-way),
include that information along with the trunk type.

■

If the jack type shown in the "Jack Type" column is GS/LS, next to the
trunk type (basic, FX, WATS), write either "GS" or "LS" to indicate the
trunk type. For a T1 trunk not used at this time, write "unequipped."

Note: For other T1 or PRI trunks, the kind of service connected (such as
Megacom 800) will be completed later.
2.

In the "Telephone Number or Equipment" column, write the telephone
number for each outside trunk on the line with the logical ID for its trunk
jack. If you don't yet know the telephone number, leave the column blank
and enter the information later.
Note: Be sure the trunk type associated with each telephone number
matches the jack type.

An example of a partially completed Form 2 C is shown in Figure 3-1. The
remaining entries (Rotary Dial, etc.) are covered in the ‘Trunk Options’
instructions later in this chapter.

3-4 Trunk Connections

Trunks

PBX System Form 2c

Figure 3-1 Partially Completed Form 2c, System Numbering — Trunk Jacks

Jacks for Auxiliary Equipment
Use these instructions only if the system has auxiliary equipment such as
Music-on-Hold.
Auxiliary equipment can be connected only on loop-start (LS) or ground-start/
loop-start (GS/LS) jack types. You cannot use a trunk jack on an 800 DID, 100D,
or 400EM module for auxiliary equipment.
If you plan to use Music-on-Hold, designate a trunk jack for the music source
such as a radio, tape player, stereo system, or Magic on Hold equipment.

Trunk Connections 3-5

Trunks

If the system includes loudspeaker paging, designate one or more trunk jacks
for the paging equipment. A maximum of three trunk jacks can be designated
for paging systems.
If you plan to use the Maintenance Alarm feature (an audible alert for system
maintenance problems requiring immediate action), designate a trunk jack for
the external alert.
To make it easier to add outside trunks in the future, use the last trunk jack(s) on
the right-most module with either LS or GS/LS trunk jacks to connect auxiliary
equipment.
Planning Form Instructions
Use the Floor Plan and AT&T Equipment Listto verify the auxiliary
equipment to be connected.
At the top of Form 2c, fill in the logical IDs for each type of auxiliary
equipment planned.
1.

Next to "Music-on-Hold," write the logical ID of the trunk jack for this
equipment. Include the music source (tape, radio, etc.) on the line
provided.

Next the "Loudspeaker Page,: write the logical ID(s) of the trunk jack(s) for
the paging equipment (maximum of 3).

Next to "Maintenance Alarm," write the logical ID of the trunk jack for the
Maintenance Alarm external alert.

Note: If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted
materials, you may be required to obtain a copyright license from, and pay
license fees to, a third party such as the American Society of Composers,
Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI). Or, you
can purchase a Magic on Hold system, which does not require you to obtain
such a license, from AT&T or your authorized dealer.

3-6 Trunk Connections

Trunks

Trunk Options
Choose from the following options for the outside trunks connected to the
system and record your decisions on PBX System Form 2c, System
Numbering — Trunk Jacks:
■ Loop-Start
■ Rotary
■ Toll
■

Disconnect Reliability

Dial Trunks

Prefix Dialing Requirements (Toll Type)

Hold Disconnect

■ QCC

Operator Receiving Calls

■ QCC

Queue Priority

If the system includes any or all of the following additional trunk options,
mark the Outside Trunks forms (3a, 3b, 3c, 3d, and 3e):
■

Remote Access

■

Pools

■

DS1 Facility

■

Tie Trunks

■

DID trunks

Loop-Start Disconnect Reliability
The disconnect signal is sent by the telephone company to the system when an
outside caller hangs up. Disconnect signals on incoming calls on loop-start
trunks are classified as either reliable or unreliable. If reliable, on every call a
disconnect signal is sent to the system by the local telephone company shortly
after a caller hangs up. If unreliable, a disconnect signal is not sent by the local
telephone company on every call.
Since the disconnect signal on most loop-start trunks is unreliable, the factory
setting for the disconnect signal is "unreliable.”
Specifying that the disconnect signal for loop-start trunks is reliable allows some
features to function better-for example, Remote Call Forward, remote call
transfers, and voice messaging systems such as MERLIN MAIL Voice
Messaging System.
See “Hold Disconnect” later in this
section.

Note: If the local telephone company uses a short Hold Disconnect interval, do
not specify a reliable disconnect signal.
Before you change the setting to reliable, check with your telephone company to
determine whether the disconnect signals for the loop-start trunks are reliable
and to obtain the length of the Hold Disconnect interval.

Trunk Options 3-7

Trunks

Planning Form Instructions
At the top of Form 2c, under the "Loop-Start Reliable Disconnect" heading
choose one of the following:
■

Check "No" if the loop-start trunks have an unreliable disconnect signal.

■

Check "Yes" if loop-start trunks have a reliable disconnect signal.

Rotary Dial Trunks
The system is factory set to generate touch-tone signals when users dial outside
calls. Identify any rotary dial trunks that are connected to the system so that
rotary dial signals can be used for these trunks.
Note: Touch-tone, single-line telephone users cannot make calls using rotary
dial trunks.
Check with your local or long-distance telephone company to determine which,
if any, trunks connected to the system are rotary dial trunks.
Planning Form Instructions
In the "Outmode Rotary Dial" column on Form 2c, check "Yes" to show rotary
dial trunks or "No" to show touch-tone.

Toll Prefix Dialing Requirements (Toll Type)
Toll Type allows the system to classify calls as either local or toll, based on the
number dialed by the user. Normally, people have to dial a toll prefix (1 or O)
before dialing the area code and telephone number for atoll call. In some areas
this is not necessary; dialing a prefix depends on local telephone company
requirements and the type of trunk used.
Find out from your local telephone company which trunks require a toll prefix.
This information is used by the system when a toll call is placed by a telephone
or data terminal on ground-start or loop-start trunks.
Note: The Toll Type feature does not apply to tie trunks.
Planning Form Instructions
In the "Toll Prefix Not Needed for LD" column on Form 2c, check "Yes" next
to any trunks on which people do not need to dial a prefix when placing toll
calls.

3-8 Trunk Options

Trunks

Hold Disconnect
Hold Disconnect allows you to set the number of milliseconds (ins) before the
trunk is released when a caller on hold hangs up and abandons the call. Local
telephone companies use either a long (450 ms) or short (50 ms) interval. The
factory setting for the system is the long interval since it is the interval used by
most telephone companies.
Check with your local telephone company for the disconnect interval used.
If your local telephone company uses the short interval, you must change the
factory setting. If you don’t change the setting, when a caller waiting on hold
hangs up, the trunk is not released.
Planning Form Instructions
In the "Short Hold Disconnect Interval" column on Form 2c, check "Yes" next
to any trunks that you want to change from the long (450 ms) interval to the
short (50 ms) interval.
See “Loop-Start Disconnect Reliability a
in this chapter.

Note: Be sure you have checked "No" for "Loop-Start Reliable Disconnect" if
your local telephone company uses a short Hold Disconnect interval.

QCC Operator Receiving Calls
Use these instructions only if the system has one or more QCCs.
Assigning the QCC operator to receive calls on each trunk determines, first, if
incoming calls on each trunk ring into the QCC queue and, second, which QCC
operator position answers the calls.
The factory setting for all trunks is that no QCC operator is assigned to receive
calls. This means that the trunk does not ring into the QCC queue.
See *Tie Trunks" in this chapter for
information on automatic-in tie trunks.

Decide if the QCC operator should receive calls for each ground-start,
loop-start, and automatic-in tie trunk connected to the system:
If you do not want the calls on a particular trunk to ring into the QCC queue,
do not assign a QCC operator to receive the calls. This is appropriate for
calls on trunks used as personal lines, those that are dedicated to incoming
calls for calling groups, and those that are assigned to direct-line consoles
(DLCs).
If you want calls on a particular trunk to ring into the QCC queue, decide
which operator position should receive the calls. You can specify that calls
on each trunk be directed to one or more QCC operator positions or to all
operator positions. This is useful when you want operators to handle only
specific call types. For example, you might want one operator to handle all
incoming customer calls and another to handle calls from sources, such as
suppliers or other branches of your business.

Trunk Options 3-9

Trunks

See "Position Busy Backup” in the
“Queued Call Console” section of
Chapter 4.

Note: If an operator presses the Backup On button on the console, any
incoming calls are directed to other operator positions (regardless of whether
they normally receive such calls) or to the programmed backup extension
number.
Planning Form Instructions
In the "QCC Operator to Receive Calls" column, on Form 2c:
Write the QCC operator position(s) to receive calls for each ground-start,
loop-start, and automatic-in tie trunk.
■

If you do not want the calls received on the trunk ring into the QCC
queue, write "None."

■

If you want all QCC operators to receive incoming calls on a trunk,
write "all."

■

If you want to specify one or more QCC operators to receive incoming
calls on a trunk, write any combination of the extension numbers for up to
four operator positions.

QCC Queue Priority
Use these instructions only if you assigned one or more trunks to ring into
the QCC queue.
The QCC queue priority determines the order in which calls on each trunk are
sent to QCC operator positions.
Decide the QCC queue priority for each ground-start, loop-start, and/or
automatic-in tie trunk ringing into the QCC queue. You can assign a value of 1 to
7. A value of 1 is the highest priority of calls and 7 is the lowest. The factory-set
priority for calls received on all trunks programmed to ring in the queue is 4.
Change the values according to the order you want calls answered. For
example, if important customer calls come in on a particular trunk, assign a
priority value of 1 so that the calls are answered before any other call types.
Assign values of 2 through 7 on trunks used for less important calls such as
calls from equipment suppliers or from other locations of your business.
Note: Since incoming calls on DID and non-automatic dial-in tie trunks route to
specific extension numbers, you cannot assign a QCC queue priority for these
types of trunks.
Planning Form Instructions
On F o r m 2 c :
1. Locate each trunk with "all" or extension numbers in the "QCC Operator to
Receive Calls" column.
2. Write the priority level (1-7) for each trunk used for incoming calls in the

"QCC Queue Priority Level" column.

3-10 Trunk Options

Trunks

Remote Access
Use these instructions only if remote users need access to the system.
Remote Access allows people to use the system from a remote location. A
person working away from the office can call into the system on one of the
trunks programmed for remote access. The system answers the call, and the
user can then do the following:
dial extension numbers directly without going through the system operator.
This means that a remote employee can call internal telephones, data
terminals, or calling groups just as if the call were being placed from an
internal telephone.
select a trunk pool, Automatic Route Selection, or special-purpose trunk,
such as WATS or FX, to make outgoing calls. If the trunk is busy, you can
specify that the remote caller is eligible for Automatic Callback. This means
the caller can remain on the call and not have to keep calling back to get an
outgoing trunk.
Note: Calls made via Remote Access to locations outside the system may
vary in transmission quality.
activate, change, or cancel the Call Forward telephone or extension number
programmed on a telephone.
Remote Access also allows remote system programming and maintenance by
AT&T or your authorized dealer.
To have Remote Access, the control unit must contain one or more 400,
400 GS/LS/TTR, 008 OPT, 800 DID, or 012 modules. These modules have
touch-tone receivers, which are required to make the Remote Access feature
work. Check the Control Unit Diagram on Form 1 to verify that one of these
types of modules is present before you begin planning Remote Access.
Note: The trunks assigned Remote Access do not have to be connected to the
module with the touch-tone receiver.
It is recommended, but not required, that Remote Access trunks appear on line
buttons on an operator console. This allows the operator to manually disconnect
a tail in case an incoming call on that trunk does not disconnect properly.
You can provide security for the system by requiring that people using Remote
Access dial a password or barrier code to call into the system. When barrier
codes are required, the caller dials a 4-digit number after the Remote Access
special dial tone. After dialing the barrier code, the caller hears the system dial
tone.

CAUTION
Under applicable tariffs, the customer is responsible for any charges
incurred through the remote use of system facilities. Precautions should be
taken to prevent unauthorized use of the system’s outside lines by remote
callers, also called toll fraud. See “Customer Support Information” at the
front of this book for more information on security.
,
Trunk Options 3-11

Trunks

You must decide which trunks you want to be used for either Dedicated or
Shared Remote Access:
When you assign Dedicated Remote Access to a trunk, all calls coming in on
that trunk receive the Remote Access treatment. This means that the caller
hears the system dial tone if no barrier codes are setup for the trunk, or a
special dial tone if you specify that a barrier code is needed.
When you assign Shared Remote Access, calls coming in on that trunk
receive the Remote Access treatment only when the system is in Night
Service (see Chapter 4).
You can assign Remote Access to any outside trunk connected to the system
except DID and dial-in tie trunks. For DID and dial-in tie trunks, Remote Access
is achieved by dialing the factory-set Remote Access code, 889.
Note: If you want to allow Remote Access on DID trunks, one of the telephone
numbers assigned by the telephone company must match the Remote Access
code, 889.
You may want to begin by assigning Remote Access to only a few trunks and
increasing the number later if more are needed. Keep in mind that Remote
Access should not be assigned to trunks and tie trunks that are used for
incoming customer calls.
See “System Numbering” in Chapter 2.
Review the numbers available in the
numbering plan you have selected.

Once you have decided which trunks are to be used for Remote Access, decide
whether you want to change the factory-set access number from 889 for DID
and dial-in tie trunks.
Planning Form Instructions
Mark PBX System Form 3a, Outside Trunks - Remote Access
1. To change the factory-set access code:
■
■

Write the new number in the "Renumber To" space.
Locate PBX System Form 2d, System Numbering - Special
Renumbers and write the new number in the "Renumber To" column
of the "Remote Access Code" section of that form.

2. Under the heading "Automatic Callback" at the top of Form 3a:
■

Check "Disable" if you do not want remote callers to use this feature.

■

Check "Enable" to allow this feature to remote callers.

3. Under the heading "Barrier Codes for DID and Tie Trunks":
■

Check "Yes" if you plan to assign barrier codes to these trunks.

■

Check "No" if no barrier codes are planned.

4 . For "Barrier Codes for Non-Tie Trunks":

3-12 Trunk Options

■

Check "Yes" if you plan to assign barrier codes.

■

Check "No" if no barrier codes are planned.

Trunks

Planning Form Instructions - Continued
For all trunks to which you are assigning Remote Access:
5 . Transfer the information from PBX System Form 2c, System Numbering Trunk Jacks to Form 3a.
■

Write the logical ID and trunk number in the applicable column.

■

Check either the "DID or Tie Trunk" or "Non-Tie Trunk" column.

■

Complete the "Trunk Type and Description" column. Include
the different bands (calling areas) or WATS trunks and different
destinations for FX trunks.

6 . Check the "Shared" column (to indicate shared access) or the
"Dedicated" column (to indicate dedicated access) for the trunks.

Class of Restriction

The class of restriction is assigned to all trunks with Remote Access. If barrier
codes are planned, you must also assign the class of restriction for each code.
Make the following decisions regarding class of restriction:
Restriction. The setting determines whether users can make local and/or toll
calls (the factory setting is for inside calls only). You can change the setting
to unrestricted (the user can make local and toll outside calls) or restricted
(the user can make only local outside calls).
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Restriction Level.If the system has
ARS, you can restrict the use of outgoing trunks by selected users by
assigning a restriction level that is less than the Facility Restriction Level
assigned to the route.

See Chapter 4 for information on
Allowed and Disallowed Lists.

Barrier Codes

■

Allowed List Asslgnment When users are restricted from making local
and/or toll calls, you can assign up to eight Allowed Lists that allow restricted
users to call specific numbers (local or toll).

■

Disallowed List Assignment When users are not restricted from making
calls, you can assign a Disallowed List that prevents them from dialing
specific numbers on the list.

To help safeguard against unauthorized system access, the system can be
programmed to require that remote users enter a barrier code before gaining
access to the system. AT&T strongly recommends the use of barrier codes.
CAUTION
Under applicable tariffs, the customer is responsible for any charges
incurred through the remote use of system facilities. Precautions should be
taken to prevent unauthorized use of the system’s outside lines by remote
callers, also called toll fraud. See ‘Customer Support Information” at the
front of this book for more information on security.
Barrier codes can be used for either DID and tie trunks or non-tie trunks. A
maximum of 16 barrier codes is allowed, each with a different class of
restriction. The class of restriction allows or denies the use of system features to
individuals or groups of users.
Trunk Options 3-13

Trunks

Planning Form Instructions
Record class of restriction on Form 3a. Use page 3 for class of restriction
without barrier codes and page 4 for class of restriction with barrier codes.
Note: Page 4 of Form 3a holds programming information for four barrier
codes. Duplicate the form if more barrier codes are planned.
Page 3 of Form 3a has two sections: "DID or Tie Trunks" and "Non-Tie
Trunks". For each section:
1.

Check "Outward Restrict" to keep the factory setting.

Check either "Unrestricted" or "Toll Restrict" to change from outward
restricted.
Under the "Allowed List Access" and "Disallowed List Access" headings:

Check the boxes if you plan to assign these lists.
Note: The ARS Restriction Level and Allowed and Disallowed List numbers
will be filled in later.

On page 4 of Form 3a, for each barrier code:
4.

Write the barrier code number in the space provided. Start with 1 and
number sequentially.

Write the 4-digit barrier code in the "Digits" space. To keep the code
private, leave the space blank.

Repeat Steps 1 through 3 listed under the page 3 instructions.

Pools
Pools allow you to group the outside trunks so that users can select trunks by a
System Access button on the telephone instead of having a separate button for
each trunk in the system.
The system can have up to 11 pools with factory-set pool dial-out codes of 70
and 890-899. When the system is set up, the following pool assignments are
made automatically:

See "Tie Trunks’ in this chapter for
information on dial-in and automatic-in
tie-trunk types.

■

All loop-start (basic and special-purpose) trunks are assigned to the main
pool. The factory-set extension number, or pool dial-out code, is 70.

■

All dial-in tie trunks are assigned to the pool with the pool dial-out code
number 891.

■

All automatic-in tie trunks are assigned to the pool with the pool dial-out code
892.

The factory setting for type of trunk connected to a 400 GS/LS/TTR, 800 GS/LS,
or 408 GS/LS module is loop-start. For this reason, the system does not
automatically assign ground-start trunks to pools, nor does the system
automatically make pool assignments for loop-start, ground-start, or tie trunks
that are emulated using a T1 facility. If you want any of these types grouped in a
pool, you must manually assign each trunk to the pool of your choice.

3-14 Trunk Options

Trunks

Each pool can have as many or as few trunks as you want, but a trunk can be in
only one pool. In addition, only direct-line consoles can have line buttons for
trunks that have been assigned to pools.
Each pool should contain trunks of the same type (basic, WATS, FX, tie)
because you cannot control which trunk is selected. Ground-start and loop-start
trunks of the same type can be mixed in the same pool. For example, basic
trunks (loop-start and ground-start) should be grouped together in one trunk
pool, WATS trunks (loop-start and ground-start) in another pool, and FX trunks
(loop-start and ground-start) in yet another pool.
Do not mix different bands of WATS or FX trunks to different cities or include
both inbound-only or outbound-only trunks within a pool. DID trunks and/or
trunks used for auxiliary equipment cannot be grouped in pools. If you plan to
assign Pool buttons on telephones, do not group dial-in tie trunks in pools.
In typical pooled systems, all the trunks (except those mentioned previously) are
grouped in pools except single special-purpose trunks and any basic trunks that
are needed as personal lines assigned to a button on a telephone.
Group the trunks for the main pool first. The main pool should contain the trunks
used most often. In most businesses the trunks used most often are the basic
trunks. If your system includes ground-start basic trunks, reassign them from the
dial 890 extension pool to the main pool.
Once you decide which trunks are assigned to the main pool, decide how to
arrange the rest of the trunks in the remaining pools.
See “System Numbering’ in Chapter 2.

Decide whether to change the pool dial-out codes. The same considerations
apply as those used for reassigning station extension numbers.
Planning Form Instructions
Review PBX System Form 2c, System Numbering - Trunk Jacks,
determine which trunks to group into pools, and mark each pool on the PBX
System Form 3b, Outside Trunks - Pools.
1. Write the factory-set pool dial-out code in the first column.
2. To change the factory-set pool dial-out code:
■

Write the new number in the "Renumber To" column.

■

Locate PBX System Form 2d, System Numbering - Special
Renumbers and write the new number in the "Renumber To" column
of the "Pools" section of that form.

3. Transfer the information about all the trunks you plan to group into pool,
from Form 2c to Form 3b:
■

Write the logical ID, trunk number, and trunk type in the columns.

■

Use the "Description" column to identify different bands (calling areas)
of WATS trunks and different destinations for FX trunks.

Trunk Options 3-15

Trunks

DS1 Facility (1OOD Module)
Use these instructions only if the system has a 100D module. Because of
the complexity of DS1 facility planning, consult with your AT&T
representative or authorized dealer as you work through these instructions.
A Digital Signal 1 (DS1) facility is a transmission system that transports digital
signals in the DS1 format. The 100D module is the interface that allows the
connection of DS1 facilities to the system. Through this module, voice and data
calls can be placed on or received by a DS1 facility.
Note: The small processor module supports one 100D module; the large
processor module supports up to three 100D modules.
Twenty-four Digital Signal O (DSO) channels, each operating at 64 kbps, plus
framing bits, are multiplexed, forming a DS1 signal of 1.544 Mbps. Each DSO
channel within the DS1 signal corresponds to a logical endpoint. Even though
there is only one physical jack, the 100D module supports up to 24 logical
endpoints ( IDs) or ports (one for each channel).
In DS1 format, calls to other digital communications systems (digital PBXs) or
central offices remain digital, and signals do not need to be converted to analog
for acceptance by the connecting trunk.
To connect the 100D module to a DS1 facility, a channel service unit (CSU) is
normally used to regulate the transmission into and out of the 100D module so
that the module matches the transmission of the outside facility. The CSU is a
hardware component needed when two endpoints are located in different
buildings or when the distance between the two endpoints makes line repeaters
necessary. Repeaters re-amplify incoming signals so that signal strength is not
lost over long distances.
To ensure that both ends of the DS1 facility “speak the-same language,” the
following options are set during programming:
■

Type of Service

■

Frame Format

■

Line Code

■

Line Compensation

■ Clock
■

Synchronization

Signaling Mode

The appropriate setting for each option is determined by the transmission facility
to which the module is connected. Each option is discussed below.

3-16 Trunk Options

Trunks

Type of Service

The system supports two types of service for DS1 facilities: T1 and Integrated
Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI). T1 service (the
factory setting) transmits and receives voice and analog data; ISDN-PRI
transmits and receives voice and analog and digital data.
Table 3-3 shows the kinds of services available through a DS1 facility and
specifies the type of service that supports them. Review the table with your
AT&T representative or authorized dealer and decide the type of service for the
100D module(s).

Table 3-3 Services on the DS1 Facility

☛

T1 *

ISDN-PRI

An outgoing, domestic long-distance
service used in place of WATS
service.

Megacom 800

An incoming, domestic toll-free
number service for voice calls.

Megacom/Megacom 800

Adding Shared Access for Switched
Service (SASS) allows Megacom
and Megacom 800 service on the
same trunks.

Megacom 800 with Dialed Number
Identification Service (DNIS)

An incoming, domestic toll-free
number service that provides voice
information service on an interactive
basis. Calls can be routed to
separate departments or
prerecorded messages can be
played for different groups of callers.

Multi Quest®

An incoming domestic 900 number
service for voice and data calls.

MultiQuest with DNIS

An incoming 900 number service
that provides callers with voice and
data information service on an
interactive basis.

Service

Description

Megacom (Megacom WATS)

Factory setting.
Trunk Options 3-17

Trunks

Table 3-3 Continued
T1 ◆

ISDN-PRI

Service

Description

Software Defined Network (SDN)

A virtual private networking service
for voice and circuit-switched analog
data calls (up to 56 kbps). SDN lets
businesses use portions of the AT&T
Switched Network in concert with
their dedicated private line networks.
However, the system does not
support “uniform dialing plan,’ which
is necessary for complete integration
with SDN.

Accunet Switched Digital Service

A digital switching service between
subscriber data stations and far-end
connection. Useful for batch data or
file transfers, high-speed faxes, etc.

Station Number Identification/Automatic
Number Identification (SID/ANl)

A caller identification service for
systems with display telephones, call
report systems, etc.

Note: The availability of the caller
identification information may be limited by
local-serving (caller’s) jurisdiction,
availability, or central office equipment.

■ SID

allows the called station to
display the station number of the
caller.

■ ANI

allows the called station to
display the billing number (main
telephone number) of the caller.

Subscribers can choose to send their own calling information to other
subscribers for display or to
suppress the outgoing caller
identification.
—- . . . . . . . . .

see - "Tie Trunks" later in this chapter.

◆ Factory setting.

3-18 Trunk Options

If you choose the T1 type for services, program the module to emulate tie trunks
to the central office.

Trunks

Planning Form Instructions
On PBX System Form 2c, System Number - Trunk Jacks, in the "Jack
Type" column:
1.

Find all trunks listed as "PRI."
■

See "Signaling Mode" in this chapter.

Write the king of service connected to each channel in the "Trunk
Type" column.
Note: You cannot use the 24th channel for services.

■

Write "unequipped" in the "Trunk Type" column for any channel not
used at this time.

Find all trunks listed as "T1-Tie" that do not show "unequipped" in the
"Trunk Type" column.
■

Write the kind of service connected to each channel in the "Trunk
Type" column.
Note: If the signaling type is common-channel, you cannot use the
24th channel and program the module for tie-trunk emulation.

On page 1 of PBX System Form 3c, Outside Trunks - DS1 Facility (100D
Module), for each 100D module in the system:
3 . Write the number of the control unit slot (in the "Slot No." blank) that
contains the module. (Refer to the "Control Unit Diagram" on Form 1.)
If more than one 100D module is used, complete the first column,
"Module 1," to show the options assigned to the 100D module in the
lowest number control unit slot. Use the second column for the second
lowest number slot and the last column for the high number slot.
4.

Frame Format

Show the service connected to each 100D module, under the "Type of
Service" heading.
■

Check "T1" (the factory-setting) if the module is used for emulated
trunks and/or services such as Megacom 800 with DNIS.

■

Check "ISDN-PRI" if the module is used exclusively for services such
as Accunet Switched Digital Service.

To identify the DSO channels, the DS1 signal is segmented into blocks of 193
bits, called frames. A frame consists of 24 eight-bit words (one for each
channel) plus a framing bit at the beginning of each frame: 24 words x 8 bits =
192 bits. Thus, a framing bit appears in every 193rd bit position of the
1.544-Mbps DS1 signal.
Frames repeat at a rate of 8000 per second, with each frame repeating DSO
channels 1 through 24 sequentially.

Trunk Options 3-19

Trunks

Two methods of framing can be used by a 10OD module, but the framing
chosen must match the framing at the far end:
■

D4 Framing Format. The system is factory set for the most common framing
format, D4 framing. A D4 frame consists of 24 eight-bit time slots and one
framing bit. To synchronize the signals, the receiving equipment uses the
framing information to identify the start of each frame and to identify which
frames contain signaling information. The framing information repeats once
every 12 frames; these 12 frames form the D4 superframe. This framing
format is used by most DS1 equipment.
ESF Framing Format The extended superframe (ESF) format extends the
12-frame D4 superframe to a 24-frame superframe, hence its name. The 24
framing bits include a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) for the entire
extended superframe and a facility data link for maintenance. The ESF can
detect more errors than D4 framing; however, ESF is not used universally by
DS1 equipment. The ESF frame format is required for ISDN-PRI and
international data transmission.

Line Code

The DS1 signal consists of a continuous bit stream of ones and zeros, encoded
into bipolar pulses for transmission. Only the ones create a pulse; the zeros are
represented as the absence of a pulse. The line-coding formats guarantee that
the ones-density requirement is met to achieve clock recovery.
To meet the ones-density requirement, either alternate mark inversion zero code
suppression (AMI-ZCS) or bipolar 8 zero substitution (B8ZS) line coding is used.
The factory-set line coding is ZCS.
AMI-ZCS. ZCS line coding monitors each DSO channel and prevents strings
of eight or more zeros. Upon detecting eight consecutive zeros in a channel
octet, ZCS line coding forcibly changes the seventh zero (second least
significant bit) to a one.
With ZCS line coding, any bit that is overwritten has no noticeable effect on
voice and voice-grade data. However, the ZCS line-coding format can cause
errors in digital data transmission.
B8ZS. B8ZS line coding encodes an ail-zero channel octet into a unique
binary sequence with a “bipolar violation” in bit positions 4 and 7. Normally,
for bipolar transmission ones are encoded alternately as a positive then
negative, or negative then positive, pulse. If two positive or two negative
pulses are received in succession, a bipolar violation occurs.
Ordinarily, bipolar violations are caused by noise hits on the signal. However,
B8ZS line coding allows the 8-bit strings to be detected at the receiving end
and converted back into the original sequence.
B8ZS line coding is preferred over ZCS because it does not cause errors in data
transmission. B8ZS violations will be passed by the ESF TI Channel Service
Unit, but not by other CSUs.

3-20 Trunk Options

Trunks

Line Compensation

Line compensation adjusts for the amount of cable loss in decibels (dBs). It is
based on the length of cable between the 100D module and the CSU or
between the module and another far-end connection—for example, a line
repeater.
The factory setting is a value of 1, which allows a maximum loss of 0.6 dB. The
other possible settings are shown in Table 3-4 (based on 22-gauge cable).
Table 3-4 Line Compensation Settings

Setting

dB LOSS

1◆

-0.6

0-133

-1.2

133 – 266

-1.8

266-399

-2.4

399-533

-3.0

533-655

Cable Feet

Planning Form Instructions - Continued
On Form 3c, for each module in the system:
5 . Under the "Frame Format" heading:
■

Check "D4" to retain the factory setting.

■

Check "ESF" to chege the factory setting (required for ISDN-PRI and
international data transmission).

6 . Under the "Suppression" heading:
■

Check "AMI-ZCS" to retain the factory setting.

■

Check "B8ZS" to change the factory setting (required for ISDN-PRI).

Under the "Line Compensation" heading:
7.

Fill in the approximate distance (number of cable feet) between the 100D
module and its CSU or other far-end connection next to "Cable Feet."

8. Use Table 3-4 to select the line compensation setting needed.
■

Check "1" (.6 dB) to retain the factory setting.

■

Check the setting (2-5) required because of the distance between the
module and tyhe CSU or other far-end connection.

◆ Factory setting.

Trunk Options 3-21

Trunks

Clock Synchronization

Clock synchronization is an arrangement in which digital facilities operate from a
common clock. Whenever digital signals are transmitted over a communications
link, the receiving end is synchronized with the transmitting end to receive the
digital signals.
The system can synchronize itself to the far-end connection by extracting the
timing signal from the DS1’s incoming digital stream. The 100D module passes
the signal to the time division multiplex (TDM) bus for use by the system. The
factory setting is that the first 100D module in the control unit extracts the signal
and provides primary synchronization.
if the system has more than one 100D module, you can assign the other
module(s) to provide backup synchronization in the event of maintenance
failure. You can also change the priority in which the modules provide
synchronization by reassigning primary synchronization from Module 1 to either
the second or third 100D module.
The source of clock synchronization is factory set to the external endpoint of the
DS1 facility connected to Module 1 (loop clock reference source). For example,
if the far end of the DS1 facility is another communications system (PBX), your
system synchronizes itself to that PBX’s clock. The factory setting can be
changed to ‘local clock reference source,’ which means that the clock in your
system is free-running (not synchronized to the far end of the DS1 facility). You
must choose the clock synchronization source for all 100D modules in the
system.
When the 100D module is used only to provide tie trunks to other communications systems, the two systems must be synchronized and one of the two
systems will be the clock source for both.
If this system is the source, program ‘local clock reference,’ and then the farend system will use your local clock for synchronization.
Be careful not to assign backup synchronization by other modules in your
system in such a way that the system at the far end of the tie trunk derives its
clock signal source from an improper source. For example, if the module
providing secondary synchronization is programmed for Imp clock, it extracts
the timing signal from its far-end connection. In a maintenance failure, that farend clock will be used by your system and passed through the tie trunk to the
system connected to Module 1. This is called a timing loop. (A timing loop exists
if two systems derive their timing from each other, even if it passes through a
third system).

3-22 Trunk Options

Trunks

Planning Form Instructions - Continued
Under "Priority" in the "Clock Synchronization" section of Form 3c:
9 . If installing only one 100D module:
■ Check

"Primary" to keep the factory setting. (this module provides
synchronization for the system.)

■ Check

"None" if the synchronization source is other than through the
100D module.
Continue to Step 11.

10. If installing more than one 100 D module, decide which module, if any,
provide the primary synchronization.
■ If

Module 1 provides clock synchronization, check "Primary" in the first
column (the factory setting).

■ If

Module 2 (or Module 3) provides clock synchronization, check
"Primary" in the column that describes that 100D module.

■ If

the synchronization source is other than through a 100D module,
check "None.

If assigning backup sychronization:
■ Check

"Secondary" in the column that describes the 100D module
providing secondary synchronization.

■

Check "Tertiary" in the column that describes the 100D module
providing tertiary backup.

11. Under the "Source" subheading in each column:
■ Check

"Loop" to retain the factory setting. The system uses the clock
of the far-end connection.

■ Check

"Local" to change the setting (The clock is free-running.)

12. Under the "Activation" subheading in each column:
■ Check
■

"Active" if loop clock synchronization is taking place.

Check "Not Active" if the clock is free-running.

NOTE: Normally, the primary synchronization source is et to "active"
and other modules are set to "not active."

Trunk Options 3-23

Trunks

Signaling Mode

Signaling is the process of communicating channel-state information (such as
dialing) from endpoint to endpoint. Two types of signaling can be used in T1
transmission: robbed-bit signaling (RBS) and common-channel signaling (CCS).
Note: The signaling mode setting does not apply to ISDN-PRI.
Robbed-Bit Signaling. RBS replaces (’robs’) the least significant bit of every
sixth frame of each DSO channel with signaling information. (RBS is also
called in-band signaling, since signaling information is embedded in the
least significant bit of every sixth 8-bit word.)
RBS is appropriate for voice and voice-grade data, but facilities using RBS
cannot accurately transmit digital data because digital data uses high-speed
data rates such as 64 kbps. Therefore, the channel is limited to voice and
analog voice-band data applications.
Common-Channel Signaling.CCS is an ‘out-of-band’ signaling format that
places the signaling bits for channels 1 through 23 into the 8-bit word of the
24th channel. The 24th channel, therefore, cannot be used for voice or data
transmissions.
Planning Form Instructions - Continued
13. Under the "Signaling Mode" heading of Form 3c, in all columns that
describe T1 modules:
■ Check

"RBS" to retain the factory setting of robbed-bit signaling.

■ Check

"CCS" to change the factory setting to common-channel
signaling.

CSU Setting for T1
Emulation

Use these instructions only if the 100D module type of service is T1 and
outside trunks are to be emulated.
For loop-start and ground-start emulation with T1, specify whether the type of
equipment provided by the local telephone company central office is foreign
exchange (the factory setting) or special access.
Planning Form Instructions - Continued
14. Under the "Channel Service Unit" heading of Form 3c, in all columns that
describe T1 modules used for trunk emulation:

3-24 Trunk Options

■

Check "Foreign Exchange" to retain the factory setting.

■

Check "Special Access" to change the factory setting.

Trunks

Primary Rate Interface Facility
Use these instructions only if the type of service on the DS1 facility is
ISDN-PRI.
See System Reference for more
detailed information.

Decide the following options for each ISDN-PRI facility:
■

Telephone Number

■ Telephone
■ Test

Telephone Number

■ Timers

and Counters

■ Terminal
■

Number to Send

Equipment Identifier

B-Channel Groups

Note: Because of the complexity of the timer, counter, and terminal equipment
identifier information, the factory settings for them should rarely be changed.
Incorrect settings can have an adverse affect on the operation of ISDN-PRI
facilities. Consult with your AT&T representative or authorized dealer when you
plan options for PRI facilities.
Record your decisions about these options in the “ISDN-PRI Facility
Options” section of PBX System Form 3c (page 3). Make a copy of the form
for each 100D module with an ISDN-PRI service type. Record the slot number in
the ‘Slot No.” blank at the top of the form(s).

Telephone Number

To allow the system to route calls to the correct destination, you can assign a
telephone number consisting of up to 12 digits.
The factory setting is that no telephone number is assigned. If you assign a
telephone number to a channel, it must match the number that is dialed by the
outside caller and sent to the system by the network. The numbers sent by the
network are furnished by the ISDN-PRI service provider. The number you assign
must also be unique within the same B-channel group and must be different
from the associated test telephone number. B-channel groups and test
telephone numbers are assigned later.
Planning Form Instructions
For all the channels you plan to assign a telephone number:
1. Transfer the information from the "Trunk Type" column of PBX System
Form 2c, System Numbering - Trunk Jacks to Form 3c. Write the
logical ID and trunk number in the applicable column.
2. Write the unique 12-digit telephone number furnished by the ISDN-PRI
service provider in the "Telephone Number" column on Form 3c.

Trunk Options 3-25

Trunks

Telephone Number to Send

If your company subscribes to the AT&T lNF02 automatic number identification
(ANI) service, you can assign the telephone number the system sends to the
network when outgoing calls are made on ISDN-PRI facilities. If the person
being called also subscribes to the same identification service, the telephone
number sent identifies who is calling.
The factory setting is that no telephone number to send is assigned. If you
assign a telephone number to send, it does not have to be unique since the
number is used only for identification and not for routing. The number assigned
can be up to 12 digits.
Note: The availability of the caller identification information may be limited by
local-serving (caller’s) jurisdiction, availability, or central office equipment.
Planning Form Instructions
For all the channels you plan to assign a telephone number to send:
1. If you have not done so already, transfer the information from the "Trunk
Type" column of PBX System Form 2c, System Numbering - Trunk
Jacks to Form 3c on page 3. Write the logical ID and trunk number in the
application column.
2 . Write the 12-digit telephone number that identifies your company as the
caller in the "Telephone Number to Send" column on Form 3c on page 3.

Test Telephone Number

For each 100D module with an ISDN-PRI service type, you can assign a test
telephone number that is used for maintenance by the service provider.

See ‘B-Channel Groups” in this chapter.

The factory setting is that a test telephone number is not assigned. The number
you assign must be the same number as that furnished by the ISDN-PRI service
provider. When you assign a test telephone number, it must be different from the
numbers assigned to other channels assigned to the same B-channel group.
Planning Form Instructions
Next to the heading "Test Telephone Number" on Form 3c on page 3, write
the 12-digit test telephone number used for maintenance.

Terminal Equipment
Identifier

The terminal equipment identifier (TEI) is used by the network to identify a piece
of equipment connected to each D channel. Normally only one is connected,
and the network assumes its terminal identifier is O (the factory setting). You can
change the value to from 1 to 63.
CAUTION
Consult your AT&T representative or authorized dealer before changing the
value. It is not likely that you will ever need to change the factory setting.

3-26 Trunk Options

Trunks

Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEI)" heading on Form 3c:
1 . Check "0" to keep the factory-set TEI.
2 . To change the factory-set TEI from 0, write a value from 1 to 63 in the
space provided.

Timers and Counters

Timers and counters are used to ensure that the system takes the appropriate
corrective action when no response is received from the network before the
programmed settings have expired.
CAUTION
Since incorrect settings could have an adverse effect on the operation of
lSDN-PRl facilities, consult your A T&T representative or authorized dealer
before you make any changes. The factory-set thresholds are standard
settings and should rarely be changed.
The timers and counters, descriptions, factory settings, and allowable
thresholds are shown in Table 3-5.

Trunk Options 3-27

Trunks

Table 3-5 Timers and Counters
Factory
Setting

Allowable
Threshold

Times the delay in link-layer acknowledgement of a
message sent over a D channel from the system to
the network.

1 second

1000-3000 ms

T203 Timer

Times the interval of each exchange of messages on
the D channel between the system and the network.

30 seconds

1-60 seconds

N200 Counter

Counts the times the system has transmitted a
message on a D channel when no link-layer
acknowledgement is received from the network.

3 transmissions

1–5 transmissions

N201 Counter

Counts the maximum number of layer-3 octets the
system can send or receive in a single D-channel
message.

260 octets

16-260 octets

K Counter

Counts the layer-3 unacknowledged messages sent
on a D channel from the system to the network.

7 frames

1–1 5 frames

T303 Timer

Times the delay in network response when the
system sends a setup message to initiate an
outgoing call.

4 seconds

4–1 2 seconds

T305 Timer

Times the delay in network response when the
system sends a disconnect message to clear a call.

4 seconds

4-30 seconds

T308 Timer

Times the delay in network response when the
system sends a release message to clear a call.

4 seconds

4-12 seconds

T309 Timer

Times the duration of a D-channel data-link failure,
which consists of a loss of signaling for the entire PRI
connection.

90 seconds

30-120 seconds

T31O Timer

Times the network delay following the receipt of a
call-proceeding message on an outgoing call.

10 seconds

2-10 seconds

T313 Timer

Times the delay in network response when the
system sends a connect message that indicates the
completion of an incoming call.

4 seconds

4-12 seconds

T316 Timer

Times the delay in network response when the
system sends a restart message to clear a B
channel.

120 seconds

3-120 seconds

Name

Description

T200 Timer

3-28 Trunk Options

Trunks

Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Timers and Counters" heading on Form 3c.

1. To change the factory setting for any timer or counter, write the new
threshold in the "Change To" column.

2. To keep the factory setting, leave the "Change To" column blank.

B-Channel Groups

To make the most effective use of ISDN-PRI service, assign B channels
(channels 1 through 23) to groups. Once you establish B-channel groups, you
can associate the channels used for ISDN service so that calls can be placed
and received on the associated B channels.
Up to 69 B-channel groups can be established. Each B channel, and channels
used for ISDN service, can be assigned to only one group. Each group can
contain up to 23 channels, and all channels within each group must signal
through the same D channel (connected to the same 100D module).
Assign B channels in the order that the system should search for an available
channel. To minimize call attempts on the same channel, the best arrangement
is the opposite order of the hunting arrangement furnished by the ISDN-PRI
service provider.
Since B channels are not associated with any trunk number or logical ID, they
can by identified only by use of the control unit slot and port number.
Planning Form Instructions
Determine which channels to group and record each group on Form 3c,
page 4, "B-Channel Groups."
Note: Page 4 holds the programming information for two B-channel groups.
Duplicate the form if more groups are planned.
In each column:
1.

Write the group number (1-69) next to the "Group No." heading. Start with
1 and number sequentially.

Write the slot and port number of each B channel assigned to the group.
(Refer to the "Control Unit Diagram," on Form 1.)
When programmed for ISDN-PRI, the single DS1 jack on the 100D module
supports 23 channels, or ports. (The 24th channel transmits signaling
mode information.) To determine the port number, assume that port 1 is at
the bottom of the module to which you are assigning B channels.
Note: If you have completed the "Non-Complex Configuration" pages of
Form 3c, transfer the slot and channel (port) information from that form.

For all channels you plan to associate with the group:
3 . Transfer the information from PBX System Form 2c, System NumberingTrunks Jacks to Form 3c. Write the logical ID and trunk number in the
applicable column.
Trunk Options 3-29

Trunks

T1/ISDN-PRI Planner
To ensure compatibility with your system, all local offerings of DS1 configurations must be reviewed by AT&T National Technical Marketing (NTM) personnel.
This review begins when NTM receives the “General Business Systems T1/lSDNPRI Planner” (pages 5 through 7 of PBX System Form 3c).
Planning Form Instructions
On page 5 of Form 3c:
1. Fill in the customer name, telephone number, and address.
Note: "Reference Number" is used by NTM.
2. Fill in the AT&T DOSS Order Number.
3. Identify the AT&T personnel handling the account: Account Executive's
name and telephone number and the System Consultant's name and
telephone number.
4. Identify the DS1 facility provider by writing the provider's name in the
"T1/ISDN-PRI Vendor" space along with the contact person's name and
telephone number.
5. Under the "Installation heading:
■

Write the date the installation is due to be complete.

■

Write
thethedate
the
equipment
scheduled for delivery to your
Write the date
equipment
is scheduled
for deliveryisto your
company next to the "Materials-on-Job-Date."

6. Under the "AT&T Installation Contacts" heading:
List the names and telephone numbers of the AT&T personnel
responsible for the equipment order and its installation: the Order
Implementor, the National Technical Marketing Manager, the National
Technical Service Center Engineer, and the Data Services Organization
Manager.
7. Under the question about whether the order has been placed:
■

Check
if theiforder
been has
made been
and fill inmade
the date.
Check"Yes"
"Yes"
thehas
order
and fill in the date.

■

Check "No" if the order has not been placed.

8. On page 6 or Form 3c, complete one block for each 100D module.
Transfer the options information for each module from the corresponding
column of page 1 of Form 3c:

3-30 Trunk Options

■

Service Ordered or Planned (Type of Service)

■

Frame Format

■

Line Coding (Suppression)

■

Line Signaling Mode

■

Synchronization Timing (Clock Synchronization: Source)

Trunks

An important part of the NTM review is to ensure that the synchronization
integrity of the network-both this communications system and its far-end
connections—is protected. To facilitate their evaluation, prepare the “Network
Planning Map” on page 7 of Form 3c. Describe the entire network of DS1
facilities by summarizing the following for each 100D module:
■

CSU used

■ distance

between the control unit and CSU or far-end connection

■ types

of facilities or services connected to each 100D module

■ clock

synchronization source

As an example, the system described in Figure 3-2 shows a large processor
module system with two 100D modules.
The communications system in Figure 3-2 is configured as follows:
Module 1 in slot 04 is connected to a model ESF-T1 CSU that is
approximately 100 cable feet from the control unit. (The DS1 facility is
connected to the ISDN-PRI network.)
Module 2 in slot 05 is connected to a 551-T1 L1 CSU that is approximately
160 cable feet from the control unit. (The far end is another communications
system.)
The primary clock synchronization source is the ISDN-PRI network
connected to Module 1. Its path is shown by a line and the letter P.
Note: The dotted line between the control unit and the PBX in Connection 2
indicates that the PBX derives its timing signal from your system.
The secondary clock synchronization path, shown by a line and the letter S,
is the system internal clock.

Trunk Options 3-31

Trunks

Figure 3-2 Sample Network Planning Map

3-32 Trunk Options

Trunks
Planning Form Instructions
On the "Network Planning Map" (page 7 of Form 3c):
1 . Fill in the control unit slot number(s) of the CSU(s) connected to the 100D
module(s).
2 . Write the approximate number of cable feet between each module and its
CSU or far-end connection. (Refer to "Line Compensation" on page 1.)
3 . Check the model number(s) of the CSU(s).
■

If "Other," write the manufacturer's name and model number in the
space provided at the bottom of the page.

■

If no CSU is needed, check "None."

4 . In the connection block(s), describe the DS1's far-end connection.
■

Check "CO" if connected to the telephone company central office.

■

Check "PBX" if connected to another communications system.

■

Check "ISDN-PRI" if connected to the ISDN-PRI network.

■

Check the type(s) of emulated trunks if the facility's type of service is
T1. Also check Services" if the facility includes services such as
MultiQuest with DNIS.

5 . Describe the clock synchronization sources according to the key at the
lower left of the map.
■

Draw a circle and line from the clock source to the appropriate 100D
module.

■

Label the circle "P" for primary, "S" for secondary, and "T" for tertiary.

6 . Make a copy of the "General Business Systems T1/ISDN-PRI Planner"
(Pages 5-7 of Form 3c) for your records and forward the original to AT&T
National Technical Marketing (NTM).
NTM also evaluates the complexity of the facility configuration requested.
Examples of complex configurations are connections into PBX networking
applications, connections to multiplexing arrangements, or applications that
involve customer engineering or design.
■

If an order is considered complex, NTM directs you to the Business
Communications System (BCS) National Engineering Center (NEC).

■

If NTM notifies you that the order’s configuration is not complex, Tier Ill
General Business System (GBS) National Technical Service Center (NTSC) is
authorized to approve the configuration.

The NTSC group’s pre-authorization review is based, in part, on information you
provide to them. Specifically, you must send them

a copy of the planner (pages 5 through 7 of Form 3c)
a completed ‘Non-Complex Configuration’ sheet (pages 9 through 11 of
Form 3c) for each 100D module you plan to install

Trunk Options 3-33

Trunks

Planning Form Instructions
Complete one "Non-Complex Configuration" pafe of Form 3c for each 100D
module. Label the top right corner of the copies "Page 1 of ____" (1, 2, 3).
On each page:
1 .

Write the module number (1, 2, 3). Indicate the total number of 100D
modules (maximum of 3 per large system).

2 .

Fill in the control unit slot number. (Refer to page 1 of Form 3c.)
In the "Services" section:

3 .

Check the box next to each emulated trunk or service that will be
connected. Check only those services allowed on the type of service (T1
or ISDN-PRI) selected for the module.

4 .

Circle the channel(s) to which each emulated trunk or service will be
assigned.
Note: No channel should show more than one trunk or service, and the
24th channel cannot be used if the signaling type is common channel.
If the type of service is ISDN-PRI, complete the "ISDN-PRI Identification
Service" section.

5 .

Do one of the following:
■

Check the "No" box if you are not planning to use the number
identification service. Continue to step 6.

■

Check the "Yes, for" box if you are planning to use the identification
services and check the service planned:
■

For incoming calls, check "ANI", "SID", or "Both." If both automatic
and station identification service are planned, indicate the order in
which the informtion should be displayed (ANI then SID or SID
then ANI).

■

For outgoing calls, check either "ANI" or "SID" to indicate the
service planned. If you are planning to prevent sending out your
own caller identification information, check the box labeled
"SID/ANI Privacy."

Note: The availability of the caller identification information may be
limited by local-serving (caller's) jurisdiction, availability, or central office
equipment.
In the "Channel Service Unit" section:

3-34 Trunk Options

6 .

Check the box that describes the channel service unit used. If you are not
using one of the two AT&T models, check the third box and write in the
manufacturer information that describes the unit.

7 .

Forward all copies of this page along with a copy of the "General
Business Systems T1/ISDN PRI Planner" (Pages 5-7 or Form 3c) to Tier
III, General Business Systems, National Technical Service Center.

Trunks

DS1 Facilities Ordering
Discussion

After the contract is signed, your AT&T representative or authorized dealer
contacts the DS1 facility vendor to discuss the T1/lSDN-PRl service order. The
vendor needs information about the communications system as well as
customer identification.
Table 3-6 describes the kind of information the facilities vendor requires. Review
this table with your network representative or dealer so that you will be familiar
with the details of the DS1 facilities order.
Table 3-6 Guide to DS1 Facilities
Communication

See your AT&T representative or
authorized dealer for the current release
and version numbers of the system

Ordering

System

AT&T
MERLIN LEGEND
digital PBX
RJ48C or RJ48X
Digital D4 Framing 04 DU9-B
Digital ESF Framing 04DU9-C
Digital ESF and B8ZS 4DU95

Manufacturer
Model
Type (Mode)
Jack Type
Facility interface Code

Digital PBX
■ Has

the EIA standard CISA transmission path
slenderized
■ Is the equipment that must be timed
■ Has an internal stratum clock level of 4
■ Provides automatic call distribution through Group Calling feature
■ Provides Ioopback (keep signal alive) through CSU
■ Is

Channel Service Unit

❑ Other

❑
Manufacturer AT&T
551-T1 L1
Model
Reg. Number GI 47226819-DE-N

❑
AT&T
ESF-T1
GIC 47216544-DE-N

Facility Interface Codes:

Digital D4 Framing 04DU9-B
Digital ESF Framing 04 DU9-C
Digital ESF and B82S 4DU95

Standard CSU jacks and test points provided
Audible Ringing Source

❑ Digital PBX

❑ Channel Service

Testing Service ❑ AT&T ❑

If a CSU other than those listed above is used, AT&T will not accept the
responsibility for its installation, connection, or testing.
Echo Control Device — not used

Trunk Options 3-35

Trunks

Tie Trunks
Use these instructions only if the system has tie trunks, including tie trunks
emulated through a DS1 facility.
Tie trunks are private lines between your system and the central office or
between two communications systems—for example, between this system and
another system of the same type, or this system and a System 25 or a
System 75.
Tie trunks must be configured to match central office requirements or the
configuration of the system to which they tie. Review tie trunk operation with your
AT&T representative or authorized dealer and make the following decisions
about the way each tie trunk operates:
Direction
Signaling Type
Dial Mode
Dial Tone
Answer Supervision Time
Disconnect Time
Mark each tie trunk configuration on PBX System Form 3d, Outside Trunks
— Tie.
Planning Form Instructions
Transfer the trunk identification from PBX System Form 2c, System
Numbering - Trunk Jacks, to Form 3d. Write the logical ID and trunk
number for each tie trunk connected to the system.

Direction

Decide if the tie trunks will send calls one way or two ways (the factory setting).
Two-way is preferable if you anticipate light call traffic; one-way is preferable if
you anticipate heavy call traffic. Two-way in heavy call traffic increases the
chance of users on both ends of a two-way tie trunk trying to use it at the same
time, in which case neither call will go through.
If you choose one-way, also decide if the direction will be out or in. For example,
if users need only to receive information from another location but do not need
to return calls, an incoming tie trunk would be sufficient.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Direction" heading on Form 3d, check the direction for each tie
trunk next to its trunk number.

3-36 Trunk Options

■

Check the factory-set "Two-Way" column it tie trunk is two-way.

■

Check either "Outgoing" or "Incoming" for each one-way tie trunk.

Trunks

Signaling Type

The choices for signaling type (also called seizure type) are wink, delay,
immediate, and automatic. Of the four types, wink, delay, and immediate are
similar in that they allow users to call people in the other system by dialing their
extensions. With the automatic type, no dialing is needed: users call an operator
who then transfers the call to the proper person.
Choose the same type as that used by the system to which you are connecting.
For incoming-only or two-way tie trunks, the incoming type must be the same as
the outgoing type of the remote system. For outgoing-only or two-way tie trunks,
the outgoing type must be the same as the incoming type of the remote system.
Wink is the factory setting, and if available, it is the preferred type, followed by
delay and then immediate.

See “Dial Mode” in this section.

Note: Immediate does not work with the touch-tone dial mode.

See ‘DS1 Facility” earlier in this chapter,
and Trunk Assignment* later in this
chapter.

For T1 facilities used for services (for example, Megacom), consider the
direction of the tie trunk and how trunk assignments will be made and select
from the following:
One-way, outgoing tie trunks. All outgoing calls are placed using
Automatic Route Selection and tie trunks are not assigned to Personal Line or
Pool buttons on telephones. Select wink signaling.
One-way, outgoing tie trunks. Tie trunks are assigned to Personal Line or
Pool buttons on telephones. Select immediate signaling.
One-way, incoming tie trunks. Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
is included. Select wink signaling.
One-way, incoming tie trunks. DNIS is not included. Select automatic
signaling.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Signaling Type" heading on Form 3d, check eith "In" or "Out"
under "Wink," "Delay," "Immediate," or "Automatic" for each tie trunk.

E&M Signal

Select one of the following signaling types to be used on the tie trunks:
■ Select

type 1 S (the factory setting) if the tie trunks are connected to the other
system through the local telephone company.

■ Select

type 1 C if the tie trunks are connected directly to a system that uses
type IS signaling and is located near this system.

■ Select

type 5 if the tie trunks are connected directly to a system that uses
type 5 signaling and is located near this system.

Planning Form Instructions
Under the "E&M Signal" heading on Form 3d, check your choice of signal
type for each tie trunk.

Trunk Options 3-37

Trunks

Dial Mode

Choose an incoming (inmode) and outgoing (outmode) dial mode, either
touch-tone or rotary. For two-way tie trunks, you must choose a dial mode for
incoming and outgoing. The system is factory set for rotary for both directions.
Note: If you have checked “Incoming” for a tie trunk’s direction and “immediate”
for its signaling type, you cannot have touch-tone mode.
Planning Form Instructions
On Form 3d:
1.

Under the "Inmode" heading, check either "Touch-Tone" or "Rotary for
each incoming-only and each two-way tie trunk.
Note: If you have checked "Incoming" for a tie-trunk's direction and
"Immediate" for its type, you cannot have a touch-tone mode.

2 . Under the "Outmode" heading, check either "Touch-Tone" or Rotary" for
each outgoing-only and each two-way tie trunk.

Dial Tone

Decide if the system will provide a dial tone for users calling in on the tie trunk.
The remote setting (the factory setting) causes the system to produce a dial
tone. The local setting does not produce a dial tone.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Dial Tone" heading on Form 3d, check either "Remote" or "Local"
for each tie trunk.

Answer Supervision Time

The answer supervision time is factory set at 300 milliseconds (ins). If the
system needs a different setting, change the time to between 20 and 4800 ms.
Use 20-ms increments.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Answer Supv. Time" heading on Form 3d, check "300" to keep the
factory setting or write the new value (20-4800 ms) in the "Other" column.

Disconnect Time

The disconnect time is factory set at 300 ms. If the system needs a different
setting, change the time to between 140 and 2400 ms. Use 10-ms increments.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Disconnect Time" heading on Form 3d, check "300" to keep the
factory setting, or write the new value (140-2400 ms) in the "Other" column.

3-38 Trunk Options

Trunks

DID Trunks
Use these instructions only if Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks are connected
to the system.

DID trunks allow incoming calls to reach specific individuals, calling groups, the
listed directory number (QCC Queue) or Remote Access without going through
the operator. Blocks of DID numbers from the local telephone company are
reserved for use in the system. These blocks of numbers correspond to the
extension numbers in the system numbering plan you selected in the “System
Renumbering” section of Chapter 2.
CAUTION
DID numbers that correspond to pool dial-out codes (or facility access
codes) can be used to avoid toll restriction, leading to toll abuse and/or
fraud. (See “Customer Support Information n in the front of this book for more
information on security.)
The options assigned to the DID trunks affect the way incoming calls are
directed to extension numbers in the system.
The options for DID trunks are as follows:
Type of DID Trunks
Expected Digits
Delete Digits
Add Digits
Signaling
Invalid Destination
Assign Trunks to Blocks
The options are assigned to blocks of trunks, and a maximum of two blocks is
allowed. Each block can be configured so that incoming calls can be directed to
specific extension numbers included in your system numbering plan. For
example, if the system has both 3- and 4-digit extension numbers, Block 1 could
contain the options needed to reach the 3-digit numbers, and Block 2 the
options needed to reach the 4-digit numbers.
Note: If you want to allow Remote Access on DID trunks, one of the telephone
numbers assigned by the telephone company must match the Remote Access
dial code. The factory setting is 889.
Record the DID trunk options on PBX System Form 3e, Outside Trunks —
DID. If your system will have two blocks, make a copy of Form 3e and write the
block number in the “Block Number” space.

Trunk Options 3-39

Trunks

Type of DID Trunks

The choices for the type of DID trunk are immediate-start and wink-start (the
factory setting). If the local telephone company can support wink-start, keep the
factory setting because it allows a greater probability of call completion during
heavy calling periods. However, if the local telephone company can support
only immediate-start, you must change the factory setting.
Planning Form Instructions
On Form 3e, under the "Type" heading:
1 . Check "Wink-start" to keep the factory setting.
2 . Check "Immediate-start" to change it.

Expected Digits

The system is capable of receiving from one to four digits from the local
telephone company. The factory setting is three digits. Check with the local
telephone company to determine the number of digits sent.
Planning Form Instructions
On Form 3e, under the "Expected Digits" heading:
1 . Check "3" to show that the telephone company sends the factory-set
number of digits.
2 . Check "1," "2," or "4" to show the number of digits sent by the telephone
company.

Delete Digits

Compare the number of digits sent by the local telephone company to the
number of digits in your system numbering plan. If the number of digits sent by
the local telephone company is more than the number of digits in your system
numbering plan, specify that one to four digits be deleted from the digits sent.
This is needed to route the call to the extension numbers in your system.
For example, the local telephone company sends four digits numbered from
1500 to 1650. Your numbering plan includes extension numbers from 500 to
650. You can specify that one digit be deleted.
Keep the factory setting of zero digits if the number of digits sent matches your
system numbering plan.
Planning Form Instructions
On Form 3e, under "Delete Digits" heading:
1.

Check "0" if your numbering plan matches the number of digits sent by
the telephone company.

2 . Check the number of digits that must be deleted from the telephone
number sent by the telephone company (1, 2, 3, or 4).

3-40 Trunk Options

Trunks

Add Digits

Compare the number of digits sent by the local telephone company to the
number of digits in your system numbering plan. If the number of digits sent by
the local telephone company is fewer than the number of digits in your system
numbering plan, specify that specific digits (1–9999) be added to the digits
sent. This is needed to route the call to the extension numbers in your system.
For example, the local telephone company sends two digits. Your numbering
plan includes extensions numbered from 1200 to 1299. You can specify that the
digits 1 and 2 be added to the digits received from the local telephone
company.
Keep the factory setting of zero digits if the number of digits sent matches your
system numbering plan.
Planning Form Instructions
On Form 3e, under the "Add Digits" heading:
1 . Check "0" if your numbering plan matches the number of digits sent by
the telephone company.
2. Check "Add these digits" to indicate that digits must be added to the
telephone number sent by the telephone company. Write the specific
digits to be added in the space provided.

Signaling

Select the type of dialing signals sent from the local telephone company. The
choices are rotary (the factory setting) or touch-tone.
Note: You cannot have touch-tone if you selected immediate-start.
Planning Form Instructions
On Form 3e, under the "Signaling" heading:
1. Check "Rotary" to specify the factory-set signal.
2 . Check "Touch-tone" to change the setting.

Invalid Destination

When outside calls from DID trunks, Remote Access users, or dial-in tie trunks
are made to an unassigned extension number, the system redirects the call to a
backup position, normally the primary operator.
You can change the setting to specify that the caller is given a fast busy signal
to indicate an invalid destination.
This setting applies to both blocks. You cannot specify a different setting for
each block.

Trunk Options 3-41

Trunks

Planning Form Instructions
On Form 3e, under the "Invalid Destination" heading:
1. Check "Send to backup position" to indicate that calls to unassigned
extension numbers go to the backup position.
2 . Check "Return to fast busy" to indicate calls to unassigned extension
numbers should receive a fast busy signal.
Assign Trunks to Blocks

Decide which DID trunks should be assigned to each block. Group the DID
trunks into blocks according to how incoming calls must be routed to reach the
proper extension number.
When the system is set up, all DID trunks are grouped in the first block.
Decide on the disconnect time for each DID trunk. The factory-set disconnect
time is 500 ms. If a trunk needs a different setting, you can change it to from
10 ms to 2550 ms.
Planning Form Instructions
For all the trunks you plan to group into each block:
1. Transfer the information from PBX System Form 2c, System Numbering
- Trunk Jacks to the "Trunk Included in Block" section of Form 3e. Write
the logical ID, trunk number, and telephone number in the applicable
column.
2. Check the "500 ms" column under "Disconnect Time," to keep the factory
setting or write the new value (10-2550) in the "Other" column.

3-42 Trunk Options

Trunks

Trunk Assignment
Fo//ow the instructions in the Data Guide
to assign trunks to data-only stations.

Use these instructions to assign trunks to telephones and direct-line
consoles. System trunk assignments to QCCs cannot be changed.
There are five different forms for recording trunk assignments. Prepare one copy
of the appropriate form for each station.
PBX System Form 4a, Analog Multiline Telephone
PBX System Form 4b, Digital/lSDN (MLX) Telephone (the front for the
telephone and the back for an adjunct connected using a Multi-Function
Module)
PBX System Form 4c, Tip/Ring Equipment
PBX System Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC) — Analog
PBX System Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC) — Digital/lSDN (the front for
the telephone and the back for an adjunct connected using a Multi-Function
Module)
Planning Form Instructions
On the front of Form 4a through 5b:
1 . Transfer the user identification from PBX System Form 2a, System
Numbering - Station Jacks to each copy of all telephone forms.
■

Write the logical ID in the "Logical ID" space.

■

Write the extension number in the "Extension No." space.

■

Write the name of the person or the location of the equipment in the
"Person or Location" space.

2 . Locate any "voice/voice" or voice/date" entries in the "Person or Location"
column of Form 2a. Under the "Station Jack Pair" heading on Forms 4a
and 5a:
■

Check the "Voice Announce to Busy" box or the "Simultaneous Voice
and Data" box to indicate the type of station jack pairs.

■

Enter the logical ID and extension number under the "Even-numbered
jack" heading.

On the back of Forms 4b and 5b:
3 . Fill in the user identification from PBX System Form 2b, System
Numbering - Digital/ISDN Station Adjuncts for any adjuncts
connected to an MLX telephone using an MFM:
■

Write the extension number in the "Extension No." space.

■

Write the name of the person or the location of the equipment in the
"Person or Location" space.

Trunk Assignment 3-43

Trunks

Planning Form instructions - Continued
4 . Identify the equipment at each station. (Refer to the Floor Plan.)
■

Check the box that describes the telephone, console model, or type of
tip/ring equipment.

■

Check the box under "Adjuncts" that describes the adjuncts at the
station.

Note: Checking the "Data Terminal" box is informational only. See the
Data Guide.

Telephones
There are seven kinds of line buttons you can assign to telephones or adjuncts
connected to an MLX telephone using an MFM (excluding QCC operator
positions):
System Access Ring button-used to make and receive inside and outside
calls. When used to make inside calls, the called person hears one long ring
to indicate an inside call. When used to make outside calls, the user selects
an outside trunk by dialing either the code for Automatic Route Selection
(ARS) or the dial-out code for a trunk pool. The system automatically assigns
this type of button to all telephones.
System Access Voice button-used to make and receive inside and
outside calls. When used to make inside calls, the called person hears the
caller’s voice. When used to make outside calls, the user selects an outside
trunk by dialing either the code for ARS or the dial-out code for a trunk pool.
The system automatically assigns this type of button to all multiline
telephones and MFMs.
System Access Originate Only button-used only to make inside and
outside calls; calls are not received on this button. The purpose of this button
is to ensure that the user always has a button available to make calls. The
button can be set to either voice or ring operation for inside calls. To make
outside calls, the user selects an outside trunk by dialing either the code for
ARS or the dial-out code for a trunk pool.
Shared System Access button-used to allow a group of users to answer
each other’s calls, join conversations, or make or receive calls on each
other’s Voice or Ring button. The Shared button is used the same way as the
type of button being shared (Voice or Ring).
Personal Line button-used to dedicate an outside trunk for use by
particular telephones in the system. The Personal Line button is used to
make and receive only outside calls. To make an outside call, the user dials
the area code and telephone number; the ARS code is not needed. The trunk
cannot be assigned to a trunk pool, but it can appear on more than one
teleohone (up to a maximum of 64 stations).

3-44 Trunk Assignment

Trunks

Pool button -used to access a specific trunk pool (for example, a pool with
WATS or FX trunks) without dialing a code. The Pool button is used to make
only outside calls. To make a call, the user dials the area code and telephone
number and does not need to dial the ARS code or dial-out code for the
trunk pool. A Pool button can appear on a maximum of 64 stations.
Loudspeaker Page button—used to make announcements over an optional
loudspeaker paging system. To make a loudspeaker announcement, the
user simply selects the Loudspeaker Page button, then speaks into the
handset. The user does not need to dial the extension number for the
loudspeaker paging system.
See Chapter 4 of System Reference for
additional information on modes and
trunk assignments.

Figure 3-3

The system is factory set to assign certain kinds of line buttons depending on
the type of equipment. For non-operator multiline telephones, the system
assigns a System Access Ring, System Access Voice, and System-Access
Originate Only button. See Figures 3-3 and 3-4.

Factory-Set Assignment, Digital/ISDN (MLX) Telephones

Trunk Assignment 3-45

Trunks

Figure 3-4

Factory-Set Assignment Analog Multiline Telephones

Although equipment such as single-line telephones, answering machines, and
fax machines do not have buttons, the system treats them as multiline
telephones with 34 buttons.
The system assigns one System Access Ring, one System Access Voice, and
one System Access Originate Only button to every adjunct connected through
an MFM to an MLX telephone. For equipment connected to a 012 or 008 OPT
module, the system assigns two System Access Ring buttons.

3-46 Trunk Assignment

Trunks

Consider the following information as you select the types of buttons to assign to
each telephone.
For multiline telephone users:
■

You can assign a combination of up to 10 System Access Voice, System
Access Ring, System Access Originate Only, or Shared System Access
buttons to each telephone (excluding operator positions).

■

If you plan to use Automatic Route Selection (ARS), consider keeping the
factory-set button assignments. They ensure that if each user is busy on a
call at least one additional button is available to receive a call and another is
available to make a call. This leaves the rest of the buttons on multiline
telephones free for customizing.

■

Consider assigning Shared System Access buttons to small groups of users
who need to be able to answer and distribute each other’s calls easily or be
able to join conversations. Each Shared System Access button you assign
corresponds to a System Access Ring or System Access Voice button on
another telephone. Therefore, to provide complete coverage within the
group, you must be sure that each System Access Ring and System Access
Voice button assigned to a telephone is also assigned to other members of
the group. Each System Access Ring or System Access Voice button on a
telephone can be assigned as a Shared System Access button on up to 16
other telephones.

■

Assign a Pool button when a specific trunk pool (for example, WATS or FX) is
used frequently. Also consider assigning Pool buttons if you do not plan to
use ARS and the system includes only one or two pools.

■

Assign Personal Line buttons when an exclusive private number is needed,
for example, for a company executive. Any trunk connected to the system
can be used as a personal line as long as it is not in a trunk pool.

For single-line telephones, answering machines, fax machines, or any other
device connected to a 012 or 008 OPT module:

See System

instructions.

Programming for

■

The factory settings for System Access buttons can be changed; however,
these settings should be adequate to meet most user needs since System
Access buttons can be used to make and receive both inside and outside
calls. Each station must have at least one System Access button.

■

If you want the station to receive outside calls on a specific trunk, assign a
Personal Line button; if you want the station to receive outside calls on a
trunk included in a pool, assign a Pool button.

For adjuncts connected using an MFM, it’s recommended that you change the
button 2 assignment to System Access Originate Only and remove the button 3
assignment.

Trunk Assignment 3-47

Trunks

Planning Form Instructions
Complete the "Button Diagram" section of each copy of Forms 4a, 4b (front
and back), 4c, and 5b (back only).
Note: The button diagrams for DLCs (the back of Form 5a and the front of
Form 5b) will be completed later.
1. Show the types of System Access buttons, by writing "SA Voice," "SA
Ring," "SA Originate Only," "Shared SA," "Pool," or "Personal Line" on
buttons 1 through 10.
■

For a Shared System Access button, include the extension number of
the primary button owner. (Refer to Form 2a.)

■

For a Pool button, include the pool's extension number. (Refer to
Form 3b).

■

For a Personal Line button, include the telephone number and, for
future reference, record the trunk numbers (Refer to Form 2c.)

2 . Assign Loudspeaker Page buttons by selecting the butoon and writing
"Page" on it.

Direct-Line Consoles
Use these instructions only if the system has one or more direct-line
consoles.
See the Direct-Line Consoles Operator’s
Guides for more on DLCs.

The line buttons automatically assigned to DLCs are different from those on
other telephones. In typical systems, DLC operators are responsible for
handling all incoming calls. Therefore, the factory setting for DLCs is that, in
addition to a System Access Voice and a System Access Ring button, as many
trunks as possible are assigned to each console. Each trunk appears on a
separate button, which means that the number of trunks assigned is limited to
the number of buttons on the console (up to a maximum of 32 on the 34-button
analog DLC).
The system also assigns a Direct Station Selector (DSS) button for each
extension number associated with a station and special-feature buttons that are
used by the DLC operator for call handling.
The number of line, DSS, and feature buttons assigned depends on the type of
telephone and the number of trunks connected to the system.
The figures that follow show initial trunk and feature assignments for digital/lSDN
(MLX) and analog DLC consoles. See the appropriate figure as you decide trunk
assignments for DLCs.

3-48 Trunk Assignment

Trunks

Figure 3-5 Digital/ISDN (MLX) DLC

Figure 3-6

Analog Multiline DLC

The system assigns trunks to buttons on DLCs in the order in which the trunks
are connected to the control unit. You can change the factory-set assignments
by removing, adding, or changing the order in which trunks are assigned to
buttons for each DLC operator.
If the system has more than the number of trunks factory assigned to operator
consoles, be sure to change the trunk assignment so that all trunks you want
answered by a DLC operator appear on at least one operator position.

Trunk Assignment 3-49

Trunks

Decide which trunks should appear on each DLC operator console based on
each operator’s call-handling responsibilities. All operators may not need the
same assignments. For example, DLC operators responsible for answering all
incoming calls usually need all trunks except, perhaps, personal lines. DLC
operators who are responsible for answering calls for specific groups usually
need only the trunks used by group members.
If the system includes a loudspeaker paging system, consider assigning a
Loudspeaker Page button to DLC positions for one-touch access to the paging
equipment.
If the system has fewer than 30 lines, the operator-only features Alarm, Night
Service, and Send/Remove Message are factory assigned as shown in Figure
3-6. The factory assignments can be changed through centralized telephone
programming or by a DLC operator.
Planning Form Instructions
Complete the "Button Diagram" on each copy of the back of Form 5a and the
front of F o r m 5 b .
1. Write the telephone number of the trunkyou want to assign in the space
on the "Button Diagram." For future reference, record each trunk's
number. (Refer to Form 2c.)
2. Assign Alarm, Night Service, or Send/Remove Message buttons by
labeling the appropriate button "Alarm," "Nite Svc," or "Snd/Rem Msg."
3. Assign Loudspeaker Page buttons by selecting the button and writing
"Page" on it.

3-50 Trunk Assignment

Features

The communications system offers these optional features:
■

Telephone Features—assigned to individual telephones, consoles, or
adjuncts

■

Operator Features- assigned to all operator consoles

■

Group Assigned Features—apply to functional groups of users (such as
separate departments)

■

System Features-affect all or most of the users

Telephone Features
Instructions for assigning these features to the individual telephones used by
both system operators and general users are:
Pool Dial-Out Code
Call Restrictions
Forced Account Code Entry
Microphone Operation
Remote Call Forward
Fax Message Waiting Receiver and Threshold
See System Reference for a complete
list of features.

Additional telephone features can be programmed by each user or by
centralized telephone programming. You can decide which telephones should
have these features, or you can let users program their own telephones with the
features they want.
Mark the feature assignments under “Optional Features” on the copies of
the forms you used to assign trunks:
■

PBX System Form 4a, Analog Multiline Telephone

■

PBX System Form 4b, Digital/lSDN (MLX) Telephone (the front for the
telephone and the back for an adjunct connected using a Multi-Function
Module)

■

PBX System Form 4c, Tip/Ring Equipment

Telephone Features 4-1

Features

■

PBX System Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC) — Analog

■

PBX System Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC) — Digital/lSDN (the front for
the console and the back for an adjunct connected using a Multi-Function
Module)

If the system includes QCCs, prepare and mark the optional feature
assignments on PBX System Form 5c, Queued Call Console (QCC).
Planning Form Instructions
1. Duplicate Form 5c, if necessary. Note that the button diagram on this
form is used as a guide for labeling the operator console buttons. You
cannot change the button assignments shown.
2 . Transfer the identification information from PBX System Form 2a,
System Numbering - Station Jacks, to each copy of Form 5c. Fill in
the "Logical ID", "Extension No.," and "Person or Location" spaces.
3. Check the box under "Adjuncts" that shows the equipment at the station.
(Refer to the Floor Plan.)

Pool Dial-Out Code
When the system is set up, users can access any trunk pool via the dial-out
code assigned to the pool. You can tailor this arrangement by restricting
telephones from making calls on specific trunk pools—for example, those
consisting of special-purpose trunks such as WATS or FX (foreign exchange).
You can also use this restriction to reserve trunk pools for data communications
only.
If you do not want to restrict trunk-pool access, continue to the “Call Restrictions”
instructions.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Pool Dial-Out Code Restriction" heading on Forms 4a through 5c:
1.

Check the box next to "Yes, dial-out codes."

Write the dial-out codes in the space provided. (Refer to PBX System
Form 3b, Outside Trunks - Pools for the dial-out codes.)

Call Restrictions
When the system is set up, users can place local and toll calls from all
telephones. You can restrict selected telephones from making outside calls and
allow only intercom (inside) calls—for example, telephones in a reception area
or break room. Or, to control toll abuse, you can restrict telephones from making
toll calls but still allow local and intercom calls.

4-2 Telephone Features

Features

See “Allowed Lists* and ‘Disallowed
Lists” in this chapter for more
information.

If these restrictions are too limited, you can use the Allowed List feature to
permit dialing numbers such as emergency numbers from a restricted
telephone. Or, instead of restricting telephones, you can use the Disallowed List
feature to prevent dialing numbers (such as ‘900’ numbers) from any telephone.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Call Restriciton" heading of Forms 4a through 5c:

See also *Delay Announcementm in this
chapter.

Check "Unrestricted" to keep the factory setting (intercom, local, and toll
calls can be placed).

Check "Outward Restrict" to restrict the telephone from making outside
calls (only intercom calls can be made).

Check "Toll Restrict" to restrict the telephone from making toll calls
(intercom and local calls can be made.)

Forced Account Code Entry
Forced Account Code Entry, requiring users to enter account codes (1 to
16 digits) before making outside calls, is used to associate calls with
corresponding accounts, clients, or projects, or to track personal calls.
Incoming calls, can be tracked with account codes, but you can neither “force"
users to enter them nor verify them for accuracy.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Forced Account Code Entry" heading on Forms 4a through 5c:
1. Check "No" if you do not want the feature assigned to the telephone.
2. Check "Yes" to require the user to enter an account code.

Microphone Operation
The microphone on MLX telephones and analog multiline telephones allows
users to have conversations through a speakerphone without Iifting the handset.
You can disable the microphone on MLX telephones (but not on analog multiline
telephones) in areas in which use of the speakerphone is disruptive.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Microphone Operation" heading on Forms 4b, 5b and 5c:
1. Check "Enable" to keep the factory setting.
2. Check "Disable" to prevent speakerphone use.

Remote Call Forward
When the system is set up, it does not allow users to forward calls to outside
numbers. Remote Call Forward provides this feature for selected telephones—
for example, for users who often work away from the office. Calls forwarded to
locations outside the system may vary in transmission quality.
Telephone Features 4-3

Features

If the telephone has a personal line assigned, you can specify that incoming
calls on that trunk also can be forwarded to an outside number by assigning the
telephone as the principal user of the personal line.
See “Coverage” in this chapter.

Notes:
■

When a principal user is assigned, calls received on the personal line are
also sent to individual or group coverage receivers unless the personal line
button is set for no ring.

■ Remote

Call Forward cannot be assigned to queued call consoles.

Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Remote Call Forward" heading on Forms 4a through 5c:
1. Check "Not allowed" to keep the factory setting.
2. Check "Allowed" to provide Remote Call Forward.
Under the "Principal User of Personal Line" heading:
3.

Write the trunk number and telephone number in the spaces provided if
you want the person to forward calls on the personal line to a remote
number. (Refer to PBX Xyxtem Form 2c, System Numbering - Trunk
Jacks.)

Fax Message Waiting Receiver and Threshold
Use these instructions only if the system has fax machines connected
directly to the control unit via a 008 OPT or 012 module or connected to an
MLX telephone using a Multi-Function Module (MFM). These instructions are
not applicable to fax machines connected to an analog multiline telephone using
a General Purpose Adaptor (GPA).
Fax Message Waiting Receiver allows you to designate-from one to four
telephones to receive message-waiting indications when a fax is received on a
specific fax machine. Fax machines can only send message-waiting indications;
they cannot receive message-waiting indications from other fax machines.
You can specify the Fax Message Threshold, which is the length of time
(0-30 seconds) before the system assumes a fax has arrived and sends the
message-waiting indication. The” factory setting is 10 seconds.

4-4 Telephone Features

Features

Planning Form Instructions
For fax machines connected to a 008 OPT or 012 module, use PBX System
Form 4c, Tip/Ring Equipment.
For fax machine connected to an MLX telephone using an MFM, use the
back of PBX System Form 4b, Digital/ISDN (MLX) Telephone or PBX
System Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC) - Digital/ISDN.
In the "Fax Machine Features" section, under the "Fax Machine Receiver"
heading:
1.

Check "No" if you are not assigning a receiver and continue to the
Operator Features" instructions.

Check the second box to assign a Message Waiting Receiver. Write the
extension number of the telephone acting as the receiver in the space
provided. (Refer to PBX System Form 2a, System Numbering Station Jacks.)

Under the "Fax Message Threshold" heading:
3.

Check "10 second" to keep the factory-set threshold.

Check the second box to change the factory-set threshold. Write the
number of seconds in the space provided.

Locate copies of Forms 4a through 5c that describe specific telephone(s)
designated as receiver(s) of fax message-waiting indications.
Under the "Message-Waiting Receiver" heading:
5.

Write the extension number of the fax machine that sends a messagewaiting indication to the telephone.

NOTE: You will fill in the rest of the optional telephone features later.

Telephone Features 4-5

Features
—.

Operator Features
Operator features apply only to direct-line consoles (DLCs), queued call
consoles (QCCs), and any Direct Station Selectors (DSSs) connected to them.
Operator features you assign apply to all DLCs and QCCs in the system.
Mark the operator feature assignments on PBX System Form 6a, Optional
Operator Features.

Direct-Line Console
Use these instructions only if the system has one or more DLCSs
There are two DLC operator features:
■

Operator Hold Timer

■

DLC Automatic Hold

Mark the DLC operator feature assignments in the “Direct-Line Console”
section of PBX System Form 6a.
Hold Timer

Operator Hold Timer tracks the number of seconds callers are on hold for an
operator. When a caller is on hold longer than the number of seconds
programmed for the timer, the operator is reminded of the call by a single ring.
You can set the Operator Hold Timer for 10-255 seconds; the factory setting is
60 seconds.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Operator Hold Timer" heading on Form 6a, do one of the
following:

DLC Automatic Hold

■

Check "60 seconds" to keep the factory setting.

■

Check the second box to change the factory setting. Write the number of
second (up to 255 seconds) in the space provided.

With DLC Automatic Hold, calls are placed on hold automatically when the
operator presses another line button or a DSS button. The feature is disabled
when the system is set up.
DLC Automatic Hold speeds the call handling for operators who frequently
transfer calls using DSS buttons.
Planning Form instructions
Under the "DLC Automatic Hold" heading on Form 6a, do one of the
following:

4-6 Operator Features

■

Check "Disable" to keep the factory setting.

■

Check "Enable" to enable the feature.

Features

Queued Call Console
Use these instructions only if the system has one or more QCCs.
The following are QCC operator features:
Hold Return
Automatic Hold or Release
Queue Over Threshold
Elevate Priority
Calls-in-Queue Alert
Message Center Operation
Automatic or Manual Extended Call Completion
Return Ring
Position Busy Backup
Operator Hold Timer
Call Types
Mark the QCC operator features in the “Queued Call Console” section of
PBX System Form 6a.
Hold Return

Hold Return determines whether calls put on hold by a QCC operator stay on
hold indefinitely or are returned to the QCC queue after the Hold Timer has
expired twice. The factory setting is that calls stay on hold.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Hold Return" heading on Form 6a, do one of the following:

Automatic Hold or Release

■

Check "Remin on hold" to show that calls stay on hold after the hold
timer has expired twice.

■

Check "Return to queue" to show that calls on hold return to the QCC
queue after the hold timer has expired twice.

Automatic Hold or Release determines whether a call that is in progress on a
Call button is automatically put on hold (Automatic Hold) or disconnected
(Automatic Release) when the operator presses another Call button. The factory
setting is Automatic Release.
Planning Form Instructions
Under "Automatic Hold or Release" on Form 6a, do one of the following:
■

Check "Automatic Release" to specify that calls are automatically
disconnected.

■

Check "Automatic Hold" to specify that calls are automatically put on hold
when another Call button is pressed.
Operator Features 4-7

Features

Queue Over Threshold

Queue Over Threshold determines the maximum number of calls allowed in the
QCC queue before operators are notified (with a tone through the receiver or
headset) that calls are waiting. You can change the factory setting of O calls
(operators are not notified) to any number from 1-99 based on volume of calls.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Queue Over Threshold" heading on Form 6a:
1 . Check "0 calls" to keep the factory setting (operators are not notified).
2 . Check the second box to show that operatos are notified when calls are
waiting in queue. Write the maximum number of calls in queue before
notification in the space provided.

Elevate Priority

Calls that ring into the QCC queue are assigned a priority level from 1 (highest
priority) to 7 (lowest priority). This allows you to arrange the QCC queue so that
important business calls are answered first. During high-volume calling periods,
however, this means that only high-priority calls are delivered to a QCC within a
reasonable amount of time, and low-priority calls go unanswered.

See "QCC Queue Priority" in Chapter 3
to review call priority assignments.

Elevate Priority allows you to determine the length of time (in seconds) before
calls waiting in the QCC queue are automatically assigned a higher level of
priority. Although the priority of every call in the queue is then increased to a
higher level, a call is never increased to highest priority (1) since priority 1 calls
are those that must reach the operator as quickly as possible.
You can change the factory setting of 0 seconds to 5-30 seconds depending on
the number of priority levels assigned to calls ringing into the queue and the
volume of incoming calls. Eight seconds is recommended for typical systems.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Elevate Priority" heading on Form 6a:

Calls-in-Queue Alert

4-8 Operator Features

Check "0 seconds" to show that the order of priority is not changed.

Check the second box to show that calls are reordered. Write the number
of seconds in the space provided.

Calls-in-Queue Alert notifies all QCC operators (with a single ring) when a new
call enters the QCC queue. You can change the factory setting (Calls-in-Queue
Alert disabled) to enable this feature so that operators who cannot always
monitor the display are notified when callers are waiting.

Features

Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Calls-in-Queue Alert" heading on Form 6a:

Message Center Operation

Check "Disable" to keep the factory setting (QCC operators are not
notified when calls are waiting in queue).

Check "Enable" so that specific QCC operators are notified (with a single
ring) when a call enters the queue. Write the extension number of each
QCC position that receives the notification in the space provided. (Refer
to Form 2a or Form 5c.

Message Center Operation allows you to designate a QCC as a Message
Center with the following options automatically set:
The only incoming calls that go to the Message Center QCC are calls to the
extension number of the QCC and calls sent to the QCC using Forward or
Follow Me.
Returning calls such as extended (transferred), operator-parked, and campon calls go to the Message Center QCC. This means that the Message
Center position is different from that of the system operator who originally
answered the call.
Group Coverage calls go to the QCC Message Center.
Direct Inward Dial (DID) calls to invalid destinations (unassigned extension
numbers) go to the QCC Message Center.
CAUTION
DID numbers that correspond to pool dial-out codes (or facility access
codes) can be used to avoid toil restriction, leading to toll abuse and/or
fraud. (See ‘Customer Support Information" in the front of this book for more
information on security.)
Assign this feature when you have more than one QCC operator position and
you want one centralized location for employees to retrieve messages. Only one
Message Center position should be assigned.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Message Center" heading on Form 6a:
1. Check "No" to show that no Message Center operator is assigned.
2. Check the second box to assign a Message Center. Write the extension
for QCC operator position in the space provided. (refer to Form 2a or
5c).

Operator Features 4-9

Features

Automatic or Manual
Extended Call Completion

Use these instructions only if the system has a QCC with a Direct Station
Selector (DSS).
The factory setting for Extended Call Completion is automatic. This allows QCC
operators with a DSS to extend (transfer) calls by pressing a DSS button. The
operator does not have to press the Release button to complete the call
extending procedure. With automatic release, the operator cannot announce
transferred calls.
You can change the setting to manual completion; the QCC operator must press
the Release button when using a DSS button to extend a call.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Extended Call Completion" heading on Form 6a:
1 . Check "Automatic completion" to keep the factory setting.
2.

Return Ring

Check "Manual completion" if the operator must use the release button to
extend calls.

Return Ring determines the number of rings before an unanswered, extended
call is returned to the QCC queue (or QCC Message Center position). The
factory setting is 4 rings. You can change the setting to 1 to 15 rings.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Return Ring" heading on Form 6a:

Position Busy Backup

Check "4 rings" to keep the factory setting.

Check the second box to change the factory setting. Write the number of
rings you want to assign in the space provided (up to 15 rings).

Position Busy Backup allows you to assign another telephone to receive calls
when all QCC operator consoles are in a position busy (Backup On) mode. Only
a calling group can be assigned as a backup for a QCC operator position.
The factory setting is that no backup is designated. If you decide not to
designate a backup, the system will not allow the last available operator position
to go into the position busy state.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Position Busy Backup" heading on Form 6a:

4-10 Operator Features

Check "No" to show that no backup is assigned.

Check the second box to designate a backup. The extension number of
the backup calling group will be completed later.

Features

Operator Hold Timer

Operator Hold Timer is used to track the number of seconds that callers are on
hold at an operator. When a caller is on hold longer than the number of seconds
programmed for the timer, the operator is reminded by a single ring.
You can set the Operator Hold Timer from 10 to 255 seconds. The factory
setting is 60 seconds.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Operator Hold Timer" heading on Form 6a:
1 . Check "60 seconds" to keep the factory setting.
2 . Check the second box to change the factory setting. Write the number of
seconds (up to 255 seconds) in the space provided.

Call Types

Assigning a QCC operator to receive certain types of calls determines whether
the calls ring into the QCC queue and which QCC position or positions answer
the calls. You can assign a QCC operator to receive the following types of calls:
■ dial

0 calls (calls to the system operator)

■ Direct

Inward Dial (DID) calls to invalid destinations (unassigned extension
numbers)

■ calls

to the Listed Directory Number (the extension for the QCC queue)

■ Group

Coverage calls

■ calls

programmed to return to the QCC queue-return from extend (transfer)
or camp-on, held calls, and operator-parked calls

The factory setting for dial O calls, DID calls to invalid destinations, calls to the
Listed Directory Number, and Group Coverage calls is that they are directed to
the primary operator position. For returning calls, the factory setting is that the
call returns to the originator. You can change the settings so that each type of
call is directed to a different and/or additional operator position, or is not
directed to any of the operator positions.
CAUTION
DID numbers that correspond to pool dial-out codes (or facility access
codes) can be used to avoid toll restriction, leading to toll abuse and/or
fraud. (See ‘Customer Supped Informationn in the front of this book for more
information on security.)
Calls sent to the QCC queue have a factory-set priority level of 4. You can
change the priority level for the call types listed above as well as for the
following call types:
■ calls

to a QCC operator extension number

■ calls

signed in (Follow Me) or forwarded to the system operator

A value of 1 is the highest priority and 7 is the lowest. Assign the values
according to the order that you want calls answered. (Priority 1 should be
reserved for high-priority incoming calls from special outside trunks.)
Operator Features

4-11

Features

Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Call Types" heading on Form 6a:
1 . In type "QCC Operator to Receive Calls" column, for each call type:
■

Write "None" if no QCC operator is to receive the call type.

■

Write any combination of the extension number(s) if one or more QCC
operators are to receive the call type. (Refer to Form 2a or 5c.)

Note: You cannot assign an operator to either Follow Me calls or calls to
QCC operator extensions.
2 . In the "QCC Queue Priority Level" column, write the level for each call
type. Assign a value of 1 through 7. The factory default is 4.
Note: The "Group Coverage Calls" section on the back of the form will be
completed later.

Direct Station Selector
Page Buttons

Use these instructions only if the system has Direct Station Selectors (DSS)
connected to digital/lSDN (MLX) operator consoles.
Operators use the buttons on a DSS for one-touch automatic dialing (Auto Dial)
of station extension numbers. Each Auto Dial button may be assigned up to
three different extension numbers, and the Page buttons determine which
extension is dialed when an Auto Dial button is pressed.
If the operator presses the first Page button, the console is set to dial the first
group of extensions assigned to the Auto Dial buttons. If the second Page
button is pressed, the operator reaches the second group of extensions
assigned to the buttons, and the third Page button dials-the third group of
extension numbers.

See “System Renumbering’ in Chapter 2
to review the numbering plans.

Set the three Page buttons to reach ranges of numbers that include the
extension numbers in the station numbering plan and reflect the number of Auto
Dial buttons available.
■

If one DSS is connected to an operator console, set each Page button for a
range of 50 numbers (matching the 50 available Auto Dial buttons).

■

If two DSSs are connected, set each Page button for a range of 100
numbers. The Page buttons then control 100 Auto Dial buttons-50 on each
DSS.
Note: If two DSSs are used, the Page buttons on the second selector are not
active.

4-12 Operator Features

Features

For example, if your numbering plan contains extensions in the 100-149 and
200-294 ranges, and only one DSS is connected, set the first Page button to
begin with extension 100 (the range includes extensions 100-149), the second
Page button to begin with extension 200 (the range includes extensions
200-249) and the third Page button to begin with extension 250 (the range
includes extensions 250-294). For a console with two DSSs connected, set the
first Page button on the console to begin with 100 (the range includes
extensions 100–1 99) and the second Page button to begin with extension 200
(the range includes extensions 200-294).
Note: Assign the lowest extension numbers in the plan to the first Page button,
the middle range of numbers to the second Page button, and the highest
extension numbers to the third Page button.
In addition to providing one-touch dialing of telephones, you can set the Page
buttons to include one-touch feature use. For example, one Page button’s range
might be set to include the extension numbers reserved for Call Park codes or
Group Calling extensions. (See the “Call Park Codes’ instructions that follow.)
Use the information from PBX System Form 2a, System Numbering — Station
Jacks, to assign the range of stations for each Page button.
Planning Form Instructions
Mark the "Direct Station Selector" section of Form 6a:
In the space under the "Page Buttons" heading, write the beginning
extension for the range of the 50 or 100 extension numbers for each Page
button.
Call Park Codes

Park allows users to put calls into a special type of hold so that the calls can be
picked up from any telephone in the system. Through Call Park codes you can
provide operators who have Direct Station Selectors with one-touch use of Call
Park.

See “System Renumbering” in
Chapter 2.

The system automatically reserves eight extensions (881 –888) for operator
parking. Consider changing these factory-set extensions to numbers that fall
within the Page button ranges. The same considerations apply as those used
during reassignment of station extension numbers.
If you are not renumbering the factory-set Call Park codes, continue to the
“Group Assigned Features" instructions.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Call Park Codes" heading on Form 6a:
1. Write the new codes assigned.
2 . Locate PBX System Form 2d, System Numbering - Special
Renumbers and write the new numbers in the "Renumber To" column of
the "Call Park" section of that form.

Operator Features 4-13

Features

Group Assigned Features
The system offers four features that facilitate the call-handling responsibilities of
groups of users. The features and the corresponding PBX System Forms used
plan them are
Call Pickup Groups, Form 6b
Group Paging, Form 6C
Group Call Coverage, Form 6d
Group Calling, Form 6e
See Chapter 1 for information about
analyzing Employee Communication
Survey forms.

To determine if any of the group-assigned features is appropriate for your users,
see the analysis of the Employee Communication Survey. You will also need
other PBX System Forms as references; the specific forms needed are indicated
within the instructions for each feature.

Call Pickup Groups
A call pickup group is a group of users who can answer each other’s calls by
pressing a programmed button on a multiline telephone or by dialing a code on
a single-line telephone.
A group member does not need to know the extension number of the telephone
through which the call came into pick up the call. The system automatically
connects the ringing call when the button is pressed or the code is dialed. Both
inside and outside calls can be picked up within a group.
Assign this feature to employees who work in a common area and who do not
have a support person for coverage. You can assign up to 30 call pickup
groups with up to 15 telephones per group. Each telephone can be assigned to
only one group.
Compare with the ‘Coverage”
instructions in this chapter.

Unlike other coverage arrangements, ringing calls do not transfer from one
telephone to the other automatically. Since users must choose to pick up a call,
call pickup group members should be within hearing distance of each other’s
telephones.
Planning Form Instructions
Review the analysis of question 10 on the Employee Communication
Survey, determine the number of call pickup groups needed, and mark PBX
System Form 6b, Call Pickup Groups.
Note: Form 6b holds the programming information for eight call pickup
groups. Duplicate the for if more groups are planned.
1 . Write the group number in the "Group Number" space. Start with 1 and
number the groups sequentially.

4-14 Group Assigned Features

Features

Planning Form Instructions - Continued
2 . Write the name of a group, such as Customer Service in the "Group ID"
space. (Refer to the survey analysis.)
3 . Write the extension number for each group member in the "Ext. No."
column. (Refer to Form 2a.)
4 . Write each group member's name or location in the "Person or Location"
column. (Refer to Form 2a.)
Group Paging
Group Paging allows users to make voice announcements that are heard by a
particular group of employees or by everyone. The announcement is heard
through the telephone speakers rather than on an external loudspeaker paging
system.
You can assign six paging groups of selected employees, such as secretarial
pools, committee members, or departments, who need to hear announcements.
Each group can have as many as 10 extension numbers.
The seventh paging group is factory set to page all extension numbers. This
group is useful if the system does not have an external loudspeaker paging
system.
See Chapter 2 “System Renumberingfor more on reassigning extension
numbers.

The system automatically reserves extension numbers 793 through 799 for
paging groups. Extension 799 is the page-all group. Decide whether to keep or
to reassign the factory-set extension numbers. Keep in mind that you can
provide one-touch use of Group Paging to operators with Direct Station
Selectors if you renumber to extensions within the Page button ranges.
Planning Form Instructions
Determine the number of paging groups needed and mark PBX System
Form 6c, Group Paging.
1 . Write the name of the group, such as Sales, in the "Group ID" space.
2 . To change the factory-set extension numbers:
■

Write the new number in the "Renumber To" space.

■

Locate PBX System Form 2d, System Numbering - Special
Renumbers and write the new numbers in the "Renumber To" column
of the "Group Paging" section of the form.

3. Write the extension number for each group member in the "Ext No."
column. (Refer to Form 2a.)
4 . Write each group member's name or location in the "Person or Location"
column. (Refer to Form 2a.)

Group Assigned Features 4-15

Features

Coverage
See “Coverage* in Chapter 2 of System
Reference for more information.

Coverage allows calls to users (called senders) to be covered by one or more
telephones (called receivers). Coverage can be individual or group assigned.
These instructions are for both Individual and Group Coverage.

Individual Coverage

Individual Coverage allows a one-on-one arrangement in which calls from one
sender are covered by one or more receivers.
A sender can have calls covered by up to eight receivers, and a receiver (such
as a secretary) can provide Individual Coverage for more than one sender. Any
type of telephone can be a sender; only a multiline telephone with
programmable buttons available can be a receiver.
Individual Coverage is set up by programming a Cover button on a receiver’s
telephone. The receiver must have a programmed Cover button for each sender
whose calls are being covered.
When a sender’s telephone rings, the call is immediately sent to the receivers
and the lights next to the Cover buttons flash. The telephones ring depending on
the type of coverage and the ringing option set for each receiver telephone.
A receiver can provide
■

See “Group Coverage= later in this
section for more on the Delayed Ring
Interval.

Primary Individual Coverage with the following ringing options:
■

Immediate Ring. The receiver’s telephone rings at the same time the
sender’s telephone rings.

■

Delayed Ring. The receiver’s telephone rings after the Delayed Ring
Interval programmed for the system.

■
■

No Ring. The receiver’s telephone does not ring.

Secondary Individual Coverage with the following ringing options:
■

Immediate Ring. The receiver’s telephone rings after the sender’s
telephone rings twice. This two-ring Secondary Delay Interval is fixed and
cannot be changed.

■

Delayed Ring. The receiver’s telephone rings after the sender’s telephone
rings twice plus the Delayed Ring Interval programmed for the system.
For example, if the Delayed Ring Interval is set to 2 rings, the receiver’s
telephone rings after the sender’s telephone rings four times.

■

No Ring. The receiver’s telephone does not ring.

Both primary and secondary Individual Cover buttons can be programmed for
each individual sender as long as the maximum does not exceed eight
receivers.
Assign primary Individual Coverage when coverage is needed between two
users—for example, an executive who wants calls answered by a secretary, or a
DLC operator who routinely covers calls for another operator.

4-16 Group Assigned Features

Features

Assign secondary Individual Coverage for senders whose calls need less
frequent coverage—for example, users who provide backup only during peak
calling periods.
See “Personal Lines” in Chapter 2 of
System Reference.

Calls received on personal lines programmed for immediate or delayed ring are
eligible for coverage. Calls on personal lines programmed for no ring are not
covered.
If a principal user is assigned, all calls are sent to the principal’s receivers only.
If the principal user has Remote Call Forward, calls are sent to an outside
number rather than the coverage receivers.
Planning Form Instructions
Review the Employee Communication Survey analysis and determine
which users (senders) need Individual Coverage.
To set up Individual Coverage, program Cover buttons on the receivers'
telephones. Locate the specific receiver telephone forms from copies of
■

PBX System Form 4a, Analog Multiline Telephone

■

PBX System Form 4b, DIgital/ISDN (MLX) Telephone

■

PBX System Form 4c, Tip/Ring Equipement

■

PBX System Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC) - Analog

■

PBX System Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC) - Digital/ISDN

Use PBX System Form 2a, System Numbering - Station Jacks for
sender information. Use Form 4a, 4b, 4c, 5a, or 5b to record this information.
1.

On the forms for the sender telephone(s), under the "Individual Coverage
Receivers" heading, write the extension number for each primary and
secondary receiver in the spaces provided.

2 . On the forms for the receir telephone(s), locate an available button on
the "Button Diagram" and write "Ind Cover" and the sender's extension
number. Write "P" to indicate primary or "S" to indicate secondary
Individual Coverage.
Note: Single-line telephones cannot be receives, and QCCs cannot be
senders or receivers.
Group Coverage

In Group Coverage, senders are organized into groups and calls received by
any member of the group are sent to a receiver.
Any type of telephone (excluding QCCs) can be a member of a coverage
group; however, no individual sender can be a member of more than one group.
A maximum of 30 coverage groups can be set up, and there is no limit to the
number of senders in each group.

Group Assigned Features 4-17

Features

Group Cover buttons are programmed on the receiver telephone for each
coverage group whose calls are covered. Only Group Coverage receivers with
display telephones can identify the individual sender. Non-display users can
determine only that a call is from the coverage group.
Three types of receivers can be programmed:
■

Multiline telephones. A maximum of eight Group Cover buttons can be
programmed for each coverage group. All eight can be programmed on one
multiline telephone, or the Group Cover buttons can be distributed over up to
eight multiline telephones.
A single receiver can have more than one Group Cover button for the same
coverage group; however, each programmed button is counted in the eight
Group Cover button maximum for the group.
QCCs cannot be programmed as Group Coverage receivers.
Note: Single-line telephones cannot be programmed individually as Group
Coverage receivers; however, if a single-line telephone is programmed as a
member of a calling group, it can receive Group Coverage calls.
A receiver can program each Group Cover button for immediate ring,
delayed ring, or no ring.

See “Call Types” in this chapter for
information on QCC operator
assignments.

■

QCC queue. Up to four QCC operators can be assigned to receive calls for
each coverage group. The QCC queue can be programmed as the only
receiver or can be programmed in addition to the Group Cover buttons oh
multiline telephones; it is not counted in the eight receiver maximum.
When the QCC queue is assigned as a receiver, the calls enter the queue
and are delivered to an available QCC operator.

■

Calling groups. If a calling group is programmed as a receiver for a
coverage group, it can be the only Group Coverage receiver for the group.
No other types of group receivers can be programmed; however, both
primary and secondary Individual Coverage receivers can be assigned.
When a calling group is assigned a receiver, the calls enter the calling group
queue and are delivered to the first available member. Since calls are sent to
the queue, Cover buttons are not needed.

When a calling group or the QCC queue is programmed as a receiver, or both
Individual and Group Coverage are programmed for a sender, Group Coverage
has a system-wide Cover Delay Interval. The delay interval is the number of
rings before a call is sent to the receiver.
Assign Group Coverage when more than one sender requires the same
coverage arrangements—for example, for all members of a department whose
calls are answered by a secretary. Also consider assigning more than one
Group Cover button on one receiver’s telephone (for example, on a DLC) if a
coverage group is expected to get large numbers of calls.
You can assign up to 30 coverage groups, each with an unlimited number of
members. Coverage senders can be a member of only one group.

4-18 Group Assigned Features

Features

Note: Group Coverage can be used alone or can be set up to work with either
primary or secondary Individual Coverage, or both. This allows callers to get
personal attention from the primary and/or secondary Individual Coverage
receiver and backup from Group Coverage. For example, a receiver such as a
secretary can have a Primary Cover button to provide Individual Coverage for a
sender who is also a member of a coverage group.
Decide the interval for Coverage Delay and for Delayed Ring (the number of
rings before a receiver telephone with the Delayed Ring option begins to ring).
You can change the factory-set, three-ring Coverage Delay Interval to an interval
of from one to nine rings. The factory-set Delayed Ring Interval of two rings can
be changed to an interval of from one to six rings.
Note: The ringing pattern heard by an outside caller is shorter than the audible
ringing heard at an MLX or analog multiline telephone even though the total time
is exactly the same. An outside caller hears from one to two rings in addition to
the number of rings programmed for the Delayed Ring Interval and Coverage
Delay Interval. For example, if the Delayed Ring Interval is programmed for two
rings and the Coverage Delay Interval is programmed for one ring, an outside
caller hears four rings before the call is sent to coverage. If both intervals are set
to their maximum values, the caller will hear two additional rings.
Planning Form Instructions
Review the Employee Communication Survey analysis and determine the
senders to be grouped. Record both sender groups and receivers on PBX
System Form 6d, Group Coverage.
Note: Form 6d holds information for eight coverage groups. Duplicate the
form if more groups are planned.
Locate PBX System Form 2a, System Numbering - Station Jacks for
sender information and the specific recer forms from copies of PBX
System Forms 4a through 5b.
Under the "Coverage Delay Interval" heading at the top of Form 6d:
1 . Check "3 rings" to keep the factory-set interval.
2 . Check the second box to change the factory-set interval. Write the
number of rings in the space provided.
Under the "Dlayed Ring Interval" heading:
3 . Check "2 rings" to keep the factory-set interval.
4 . Check the second box to change the factory-set interval. Write the
number of rings in the space provided.

Group Assigned Features 4-19

Features
Planning Form Instructions - Continued
In each column:
5.

Write the group number in the "Group No." space. Start with 1 and
number the groups sequentially.

List the extension numbers of all senders in the group in the upper block.
Refer to Form 2a.)

7 . List the extension number of all receivers for the group in the lower
block. (Refer to Form 2a.)
■

If designating a calling group as a receiver, write "Calling Group" next
to the extension number. (Refer to Form 6e.)
Note: If you have not yet created calling groups, your must defer
naming them as receivers until later.

■

If naming the QCC queue as a receiver, check that box.

On each copy of Forms 4a, 4b, 5a and 5b that describes a specific
receiver:

See “Call Types” in this chapter to
review assigning QCC operators to
receive calls.

Locate an available button in the "Button Diagram" area.

Write "Group Cover" and the coverage group number in the space
available.

If designating the QCC Queue as a receiver, locate the "Group Coverage
Calls" block on the back of Form 6a.
10.

Write the extension(s) for the QCC operator position(s) to receive the
calls in the "QCC Operator to Receive Calls" column. (Refer to Form 2a.)

11.

Write the level for each coverage group's calls in the "QCC Queue
Priority Level" column. Assign a value of 1 (highest) through 7.

Group Calling
Group Calling allows you to group the telephones of people (such as ticketing
agents) who all handle the same type of call. Through the Group Calling feature
all telephones in the group are assigned to a single extension number that is
used by both inside and outside callers to reach the group. The individual
extension numbers of the telephones are still used by callers who need to reach
a specific member of the calling group.
See "Extension Status" instructions later
in this chapter for details.

Note: The Extension Status must be set for the Group Calling/CMS
configuration in order for calling groups to be available.
Calls to the single extension number are distributed among the group members
in a circular pattern. The system hunts for the first available telephone, starting
with the one that received the last call. If no group member telephone is
available, calls are held in a queue and the caller can be given a recorded
announcement explaining the delay.

4-20 Group Assigned Features

Features

Group members make themselves available to take calls by logging in and
unavailable to take calls by logging out using a programmed button or dialing a
code. Calls for the group are received at the telephone only when the group
member is logged in and is not busy on the telephone.
Calls to group members ring on System Access Voice, System Access Ring, or
Shared System Access buttons. If the call is not answered within 30 seconds,
the call is sent to another member or back to the queue. If the call is not
answered, the system automatically logs out the telephone and makes it
unavailable for subsequent calls until the group member logs in.
Assign Group Calling for people who handle the same type of incoming calls.
Sales representatives, service representatives, and ticketing agents are good
candidates.

See “System Renubmering" in Chapter 2
for more on reassigning extension
numbers.

■

Assign up to 32 calling groups with up to 20 members per group. Each
telephone user can be a member of only one calling group.

■

Designate particular trunks to ring directly into a calling group. Incoming
calls on a given trunk can be directed to only one calling group.

■

If you are using the MERLIN Attendant or another voice messaging system,
reserve one or more calling groups for that feature.

The system automatically reserves extension numbers 770-791 and 7920-7929
for calling groups. (These may be changed.) If operators with DSSs need onetouch use of Group Calling, renumber to extensions that fall within the Page
button ranges.
Planning Form Instructions
Review the Employee Communication Survey analysis and determine the
number of calling groups needed. Make that number of copies of both sides
of PBX System Form 6e, Group Calling.
Instructions for completing the back of
Form 6e follow.

Note: Form 6e has two sides. List the extensions (and trunks) assigned to
the groups on the front and specify the options assigned to the group on the
back.
On the front of Form 6e:
1. Write the group number in the "Group No." space. Start with 1 and
number sequentially.
2. Write the name of the group in the "Group ID" space. (Refer to the survey
analysis.)
3 . Write the factory-set extension number in the space provided (770 for
group 1, 771 for group 2, etc.).

Group Assigned Features 4-21

Features

Planning Form Instructions - Continued
4 . To change the factory-set extension number:
■

Write the new number in the "Renumber To" space.

■

Locate PBX System Form 2d, System Renumbering - Special
Renumbers and write the Group ID and new number in the
"Renumber To" column of the "Group Calling" section of that form.

5 . In the "Stations" area of Form 6e, write the extension number of each
member of the group in the "Ext No." column and the name of the person
of location in the "Person or Location" column. (Refer to Form 2a.)
Note: Before you complete the extension number and name entries, read
the "Hunt Type" instructions that follow.
6.

In the "Trunks" area of Form 6e, for each trunk that is to ring directly into
the calling group, write the trunk number next to the logical ID. (Refer to
Form 2c.)

If assigning a calling group as backup for a queued call console, mark PBX
System Form 6a, Optional Operator Features.
7.

Write the extension number of the calling group under the "Position Busy
Backup" heading in the "Queued Call Console" section.

The following options are available for a calling group:
Hunt Type
Delay Announcement
Message-Waiting Receiver
Calls-in-Queue Alarm Threshold
External Alert for Calls-in-Queue Alarm
Overflow Coverage
Overflow Threshold
Group Type
Use the “Calling Group Options” section on the back of each copy of
Form 6e to record each option. Copy the Group No. and ID from the front of
the form.
Hunt Type

Hunt Type allows you to change the hunting pattern from the factory-set circular
type to linear. The system then searches for an available telephone in the order
that telephones are assigned to the calling group.
If you choose linear hunt, be sure you have listed the extension numbers and
names in the ‘Stations’ area on the front of Form 6e in the order that you want
the group searched. If you have not done this, go back and correct the front of
the form so that the extensions are in the right order.

4-22 Group Assigned Features

Features

Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Hunt Type" heading on Form 6e, do one of the following:

Delay Announcement

■

Check "Circular" to keep the Factory-set hunting pattern.

■

Check "Linear" to change the factory-set hunting pattern.

Delay Announcement allows you to designate an announcement device to play
messages to callers. The announcement plays once for each call that is placed
in the queue.
The device designated for Calling Group delay announcement can be any
device connected directly to the control unit on a 008 OPT or 012 basic
telephone module. Also, the device can be connected to digital/lSDN (MLX)
telephones using a Multi-Function Module (MFM) in the tip/ring mode.

See “Call Restrictions” in this chapter for
information on toll restriction.

Only one announcement device can be designated for each calling group;
however, more than one calling group can use the same announcement device.
The announcement device should not be assigned as a group member, and it
must be outward restricted to prevent anyone attaching a telephone and dialing
unauthorized calls.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Delay Announcement" heading on Form 6e:
1. Do one of the following:
■

Check "No" if you do not want an announcement device and continue to
the "Message Wating Receiver" instructions.

■

Check the second box to designate an announcement device. Write the
extension number for the device in the space provided. (Refer to Form 2a
or 2b.)

Locate the copies of Forms 4b, 4c, and 5b that describe the device(s) you
are designating for delay announcement use.
In the "Type" or "Adjuncts" section under "Answering Machine":
2 . Check the box that indicates that the answering machine is used as a
delay announcement device.
3 . Write the calling group extension number(s) for the group(s) using the
device.
4 . Verify that "Outward Restrict" is the selected Call Restriction option.
Message Waiting Receiver

Message Waiting Receiver allows you to designate a telephone to receive
message-waiting indications for the group. The message receiver for a calling
group does not have to be a member of the group.
Each calling group can have only one telephone assigned as its message
receiver. The same telephone can be assigned as the message receiver for
more than one calling group.

Group Assigned Features 4-23

Features

Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Message Waiting Receiver" heading on Form 6e, do one of the
following:

Calls-in-Queue Alarm
Threshold
See "External Alert for Calls-in-Queue
Alarm* that follows.

■

Check "No" if you are not assigning a receiver.

■

Check the second box if assigning a receiver. Write the extension number
of the the Message Waiting Receiver. (Refer to Form 2a.)

Calls-in-Queue Alarm Threshold allows you to set the limit for the number of
unanswered calls that wait in the calling group queue before group members
are notified. Once the threshold is reached, group members are notified with a
light on the telephone and an external alert if one is assigned.
The factory-set threshold is 1 call. You can change the number of calls to up to
99 calls.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Calls-in-Queue Alarm Threshold" heading on Form 6e, do one of
the following:

External Alert for Calls-inQueue Alarm

■

Check "1 call" to keep the factory setting.

■

Check the second box to change the factory-set nember of calls allowed
in the queue before members are notified. Write the number of calls in the
space provided.

External Alert for Calls-in-Queue Alarm allows group members to be notified by
an external alert when calls waiting in the queue are equal to or greater than the
programmed threshold. The alerting signal remains active until the number of
calls in the queue drops below the threshold.
Note: Since the signal is continuous, it is recommended that only lamp-type
external alerting devices be used.
The external alert designated for Calls-in-Queue Alarm can be any alerting
device connected through a Multi-Function Module (MFM) in the External Alert
mode for digital/lSDN (MLX) telephones. Only one external alert can be
designated for each calling group.
Note: An alert connected to a Supplemental Alert Adapter (SAA) for an analog
multiline telephone should not be used as a Calls-in-Queue Alarm.

4-24 Group Assigned Features

Features

Planning Form Instructions
Under the "External Alert for Calls-in-Queue Alarm" on Form 6e:
1 . Do one of the following:
■

Check "No" if you do not want an external alert for Calls-in-Queue Alarm
and continue to the "Overflow Coverage" instructions.

■

Check the second box to designate an external alert. Write the extension
number for the alert in the space provided. (Refer to Form 2b).

Locate the copies of Form 4b and 5b that describe the alerting device you
are designating for Calls-in-Queue Alarm use.
In the "Adjuncts" section, under "Alert device":
2 . Check the box that indicates the alert is used as a Calls-in-Queue Alarm.
3.

Overflow Coverage and
Overflow Threshold

Write the calling group extension number in the space provided.

You can provide backup coverage for a calling group by designating another
calling group or the QCC queue to receive calls when the number of calls
waiting in the queue reaches a certain level.
A calling group can provide overflow coverage for more than one calling group;
however, group members cannot tell which group’s calls they are answering. In
addition, callers do not hear the overflow group’s delay announcement.
If you assign an overflow group, choose the threshold (the number of calls to
wait in queue before they are sent to the overflow group). The factory setting
is 1. You can change the setting to up to 99 calls.
Planning Form Instructions
Locate the copy of PBX System Form 6e, Group Calling that lists the
extension number for the group to be designated as the overflow calling
group.
Under the "Overflow Coverage" heading on Form 6e:
1.

Check "No" if you do not want overflow coverage and continue to the
"Group Type" instructions.

Check the second box to designate overflow coverage by another calling
group. Write the calling group number of the overflow calling group in the
space provided.

Check the third box to designate that overflow coverage will be provided
by QCC operators.

Under the heading "Overthrow Threshold":
4.

Check "1 call" to retain the factory setting.

5 . Check the second box to change the threshol. Write the number of calls
(up to 99) in the space provided.

Group Assigned Features 4-25

Features

Group Type

Group Type determines whether or not the system automatically logs in
members of a calling group following a power failure. The factory setting is no
automatic system Iogin (auto Iogout).
You can change the factory setting to one of the following:
Auto Login. Use this setting when a Call Management System (CMS) is
connected to the system to specify that the system automatically logs in
calling group members following a power failure and does not log out users
who do not answer a call. This setting is also used for calling groups used for
data (called data hunt groups). See the Data Guide for more detailed
information.
Integrated VMI. Use this setting when a voice messaging system such as
AUDIX Voice Power—lS II or MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System, which
requires special signaling for integrated operation, is connected to one or
more station jacks assigned to a calling group. The system automatically
logs in the group members following a power failure.
Generic VMI. Use this setting when a voice messaging system such as
MERLIN Attendant or Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant-lS II,
which does not require special signaling, is connected to one or more station
jacks assigned to a calling group. The system automatically logs in the group
members following a power failure.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Group Type" heading on Form 6e:
1. Check "Auto Logout" to keep the factory setting of no automatic login.
2 . To change the factory setting from Auto Logout:

4-26 Group Assigned Features

■

Check "Auto Login" to show automatice login for a CMS or a data
station.

■

Check "Integrated VMI" to show automatic login for a voice messaging
system that requires special signaling for integrated operation.

■

Check "Generic VMI" to show automatic login for a voice messaging
system that does not require special signaling.

Features

System Features
See System Reference for more
information on system features.

System features affect all users and all or most of the telephones. Record your
decisions about them on PBX System Form 6f, System Features.

Transfer of Calls Options
The Transfer feature allows users to transfer outside or inside calls to another
telephone through the following options:

Transfer Return Interval

■

Transfer Return Interval

■

One-Touch Transfer

■

Transfer Audible

■

Type of Transfer

The Transfer Return Interval is the number of rings before a call transferred to
another telephone is returned to the person transferring the call.
The factory-set number of rings IS four. You can change the setting to one to
nine rings or change the setting to zero if you do not want the calls to return to
the original telephone.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Return Time Interval" heading in the "Transfer Options" section of
Form 6f, do one of the following:

One-Touch Transfer

■

Check "4 rings" to keep the factory setting.

■

Check "0 rings" to indicate no return for transferred calls.

■

Check the third box to change the factory-set number of rings. Write the
number of rings in the space provided.

When the system is set up, it is set for One-Touch Transfer, which allows users
to transfer calls to another person by pressing a preprogrammed Auto Dial
button or DSS button for that person. You can change this option to One-Touch
Hold so that people must use the Transfer button to initiate transfers.
If you decide to keep One-Touch Transfer, decide whether transfer completion
is manual or automatic:
■

Automatic completion (the factory setting) means that transfer is initiated and
completed by pressing the Auto Dial or DSS button.

■

Manual completion means that the person transferring the call can consult
with the other person, and then complete the transfer by pressing another
button (after pressing the Auto Dial button or DSS button).

System Features 4-27

Features

Planning Form Instructions
Under the "One-Touch Call Handling" heading in the "Transfer Options"
section of Form 6f, do one of the following:
■

■

Transfer Audible

Check "One-Touch Transfer" to keep the factory setting.
■

To keep the factory-set automatic completion of transfers, check that
box.

■

To change the factory setting to manual completion, check that box.

Check "One-Touch Hold" if you do not want to keep the One-Touch
Transfer feature.

The Transfer Audible option allows you to select whether an outside caller hears
Music-on-Hold or ringing (called ringback) while being transferred.
Note: If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted
materials, you may be required to obtain a copyright license from, and pay
license fees to, a third party such as the American Society of Composers,
Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI). Or, you
can purchase a Magic on Hold system, which does not require you to obtain
such a license, from AT&T or an authorized representative.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Transfer Audible" heading in the "Transfer Options" section of
Form 6f do one of the following:

Type of Transfer

■

Check "Music-on-Hold" if you plan to play music while callers are being
transferred.

■

Check "Ringback" if you're not providing music.

Type of Transfer determines whether the system automatically selects a Ring or
Voice button when the person transferring a call presses either the Transfer
button or an Auto Dial button for One-Touch Transfer. The factory setting is the
Ring button. You can change the factory setting to the Voice button, which
means that calls can be transferred with a voice announcement.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Type of Transfer" heading in the "Transfer Options" section of
Form 6f, do one of the following:

4-28 System Features

■

Check "Ring button" for the system to select a Ring button for transferred
calls.

■

Check "Voice button" for the system to select a Voice button for
transferred calls.

Features

Camp-On Return Time
Camp-On Return Time is the number of seconds a caller waits when a person
uses the Camp-On feature to complete the transfer of a call to a busy telephone.
If the telephone is still busy at the end of the programmed interval, the call
returns to the person who transferred the call.
You can change the factory-set 90-second interval to 30-300 seconds.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Camp-On Return Time" heading on Form 6f, do one of the
following:
■

Check "90 seconds" to keep the factory-set interval.

■

Check the second box to change the fatory-set interval. Write the
number of seconds in the space provided.

Call Park Return Time
Call Park Return Time is the number of seconds a caller waits when a person
uses the Call Park feature to put a call on hold. If the call is not picked up at the
end of the programmed interval, the call returns to the person who parked the
call.
You can change the factory-set 180-second interval to 30-300 seconds.
Planning Form instructions
Under the "Call Park Return Time" heading on Form 6f, do one of the
following:
■

Check "180 seconds" to keep the factory-set interval.

■

Check the second box to change the factory-set interval. Write the
number of second in the space provided.

Automatic Callback
Automatic Callback enables the system to automatically complete calls to busy
trunks or extensions as soon as the extension or trunk becomes available.
The system alerts the user that the call is ready for completion by ringing the
telephone. If the user does not answer within a certain number of rings, the
system cancels the request. The number of rings before the system cancels the
request is called the Automatic Callback Interval.
You can change the factory-set Automatic Callback interval of three rings to one
to six rings.

System Features 4-29

Features

Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Automatic Callback Interval" heading on Form 6f, do one of the
following:
■

Check "3-rings" to keep the factory-set interval.

■

Check the second box to change the factory-set interval. Write the
number of rings in the space provided.

Extension Status
Extension Status allows an operator, a calling group supervisor, or a Call
Management System (CMS) supervisor to determine the status of a telephone at
a glance. The lights next to the buttons on a DSS or next to Auto Dial buttons
programmed with extension numbers indicate the status of the telephone.
There are two configurations for Extension Status:
■

Hotels or motels may assign different
meanings to the three extension states.

■

In the hotel configuration, employees at the front desk of hotels and motels
use the feature to monitor room availability and to restrict the telephones “
when the rooms are not occupied. There are three extension states:
■

Status O-green light is off. Room is occupied and telephone is in
regular call-handling state.

■

Status 1-green light is flashing. Room is vacant and ready for
cleaning, and outside calls cannot be made from the telephone.

■

Status 2-green light is on. Room is vacant and outside calls cannot be
made from the telephone.

In the Group Calling/CMS configuration, calling group or CMS supervisors
use this feature to monitor the availability of agents to take calls directed to
the calling group. There are two extension states:
■

Status 0-green light is off. Telephone is signed out from the group and
the agent is unavailable to take calls.

■

Status 2-green light is on. Telephone is signed into the group and
calls can be sent to the agent.

Decide on the configuration and assign operator positions to monitor extension
status. If no positions are assigned, the feature is not active.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Extension Status" heading of Form 6f:
1.

Check "Assign to operator positions." Write the extension number for each
operator position in the space provided. (Refer to the appropriate copy of
Form 5a, 5b, or 5 c . )

2 . Check "Group Calling/CMS" to keep the factory-set configuration.
3 . Check "Hotel" to change the configuration.
On all copies of Form 5a, 5b or 5c, under the heading "Extension Status":
4. Check "No" or "Yes" to indicate whether the feature is active.

4-30 System Features

Features

Station Message Detail Recording
Use these instructions only if connecting Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR).
SMDR allows you to keep track of telephone usage. Through this feature
detailed call reports are generated that include information about incoming and
outgoing calls, such as date and time, the length of the call, the trunk used, the
user’s extension number, the dialed number, and the account code.
The information in call reports is helpful for billing customers and internal
departments for telephone calls. It helps to identify telephone misuse and
develop records of telephone traffic patterns to improve system efficiency.
SMDR works in conjunction with the Call Accounting System (CAS/B, CAS/H,
CAT/B, or CAT/H) or a serial printer (AT&T 572 printer or equivalent) connected
to the SMDR port on the control unit. The SMDR port is the upper RS-232 jack
on the processor module.
Following are your choices of options if you use SMDR:
■

Call Report Format Choose either the factory-set basic format or the ISDN
format. Select the ISDN format if you subscribe to the AT&T INF02 automatic
number identification (ANI) service. With the ISDN format, the ANI appears in
the Number field of the call report.
Note: The availability of the caller identification information may be limited
by local-sewing (caller’s) jurisdiction, availability, or central office equipment.

■

Call Length. The system is factory set to record only calls that last at least 40
seconds. You can choose a new setting of from O to 255 seconds as the
maximum length before it is recorded.

■

Calls Reported. Choose whether information is to be recorded for the factory
setting of incoming and outgoing calls or for outgoing calls only.

Note: To have accurate reports, the system date and time must be set to the
current date and time when the system is installed. Be sure you checked “Yes m
for each of these options on Form 1.
Planning Form Instructions
In the "SMDR Options" section of Form 6f:
Under the "Call Report Format" heading, do one of the following:
■

Check "Basic" to keep the factory-set format.

■

Check "ISDN" to change the report format.

Under the "Call Length" heading, do one of the following:
■

Check "40 seconds" to keep the factory-set call length.

■

Check the second box to change the factory-set call length. Write the
number of seconds in the space provided.

Under the "Calls Reported" heading, do one of the following:
■

Check "Incoming and outgoing" to keep the factory setting.

■

Check "Outgoing only" to change the factory setting.

System Features 4-31

Features

Inside Dial Tone
Two types of inside dial tone are offered, which make it easy to distinguish an
inside line from an outside trunk—system internal dial tone (the factory setting)
and outside trunk dial tone.
Some software applications, such as voice messaging systems, or hardware,
such as modems, do not recognize the internal dial tone. In this case, change
the system so that inside dial tone is the same as the outside dial tone to allow
recognition by a third-party system.
Consult with AT&T or an authorized representative to help guide your decision.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Inside Dial Tone" heading on Form 6f, do one of the following:
■

Check "Inside" to keep the factory-set system internal dial tone.

■

Check "Outside" to change the dial tone to match the outside trunk dial
tone.

Reminder Service Cancel
Through Reminder Service operators can have the system place reminder calls
to people at preset times. For example, a hotel operator can set the time for a
wake-up call to a room telephone. Reminder times can be set and canceled for
any telephone in the system.
Reminder Service also allows regular telephone users to use the telephone like
an alarm clock to remind them of an appointment or meeting. Users can set and
cancel their own reminder times on their telephones.
You can set a time so that all reminders are canceled at that time every day—for
example, at the end of the business day when all users have gone home and
are not available to receive reminders.
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Reminder Service Cancel" heading on Form 6f, do one of the
following:
■

Check "No" if you do not want to set a Reminder Service cancel time.

■

Check the second box to set a time to cancel all reminders in the system.
Write the time of day in the space provided.

Redirect Calls to Unassigned Extension Numbers
The factory setting for calls made to unassigned extension numbers by Remote
Access users or on Direct Inward Dial (DID) or dial-in tie trunks is that the calls
are redirected to the primary operator.

4-32 System Features

Features

CAUTION
DID numbers that correspond to pool dial-out codes (or facility access
codes) can be used to avoid toll restriction, leading to toll abuse and/or
fraud. (See “Customer Support Information” in the front of this book for more
information on security.)
You can change the setting so that calls are redirected to
■

another extension number

■

the QCC queue

■

a calling group
Planning Form Instructions
Under the "Calls to Unassigned Extension" headin on Form 6f, do one of
the following:
■

Check "Primary Operator" to keep the factory setting.

■

To change from the factory-set redirect to the primary operator:
■

Check "QCC" to redirect calls to a QCC operator. Write the extension
number in the space provided. (Refer to Form 2a.)

■

Check "Another extension" to redirect calls to another telephone. Write
the extension number in the space provided. (Refer to Form 2a.)

■

Check "Calling Group" to redirect calls to a calling group. Write the
calling group extension number in the space provided. (Refer to
Form 6e.)

Allowed Lists
Use these instructions only if call restrictions are assigned to any
telephones.
An Allowed List is a list of telephone numbers that a restricted telephone can
dial. For example, if a telephone is restricted from making toll calls, an Allowed
List permits the user to call specific area codes and/or exchanges. Or, if a
telephone is restricted from making any outgoing calls, you can design an
Allowed List that permits calls to specific local or toll numbers, such as 911.
You can design up to eight lists, each with a maximum of 10 numbers. Each
number can have up to six digits—for example, an area code followed by an
exchange. You can include a leading 1, which the system doesn’t count as one
of the six digits, if a toll prefix is required. Once you have designed the lists,
decide which restricted telephones have access to the list. Each restricted
telephone can have access to one to eight lists.
If FX (foreign exchange) or tie trunks are connected to the system, you can allow
people with restricted telephones to dial numbers to the area code for the FX or
tie trunk if you enter the exchange in the Allowed List. For example, if you have
an Albuquerque FX trunk (to the 345 exchange in the 505 area code), record
“345’ as the Allowed List entry, not ‘505345.’
System Features 4-33

Features

As you design each list, consider which numbers need to be called by specific
groups of restricted users. Suppose you had customer service representatives
with toll restricted telephones in Colorado who need to speak with customers in
New Mexico (area code 505) and Arizona (area code 602). You would design a
list with area codes 505 and 602 and assign the customer service
representatives access to that list.
Another list of emergency numbers could be designed for telephones that are
restricted from local and toll calls. This ensures that telephones restricted from
making outside calls can be used in an emergency.
Note: If you assign a zero as the first digit for any entry in an Allowed List, any
toll restrictions assigned for calls to numbers that can be placed by local or toll
operators are removed.
Planning Form Instructions
On PBX System Form 6g, Allowed Lists:

See ‘Remote Access" in Chapter 3.

Write the name of the list in the space next to the list number.

Write the allowed area codes and/or exchanges in the column (a
maximum of 10 entries per list).

Write the extension numbers of the telephones that need access to the list
in the "Allow To Ext Nos." column. (Refer to Form 2a.)

If you planned Remote Access with restrictions and want to permit Allowed
List numbers to remote access users, locat PBX SYstem Form 3a, Outside
Trunks-Remote Access.
On page 3, "Class of Restrictions without Barrier Codes":
4.

Write the list numbers under the heading "Allowed List Access" (for either
or both tie and non-tie trunks).

On all copies of page 4, "Class of Restrictions with Barrier Codes:"
5.

Write the list numbers under the heading "Allowd List Access" (for each
barrier code assigned).

Note: Allowed List Class of Restriction assignments apply to all Remote
Access users and cannot be assigned on an individual basis.

Disallowed Lists
Use Disallowed Lists to prevent people from making calls to specific numbers—
numbers that even unrestricted telephones cannot dial. You can use this feature
instead of restricting telephones totally from making toll or local calls.
For example, to prevent people from calling time and temperature, their
horoscopes, or other services typically offered on the 976 exchange, disallow
calls to that exchange. Or, to prevent employees from calling ‘talk” lines typically
offered in the 900 area code, disallow calls to that area code.
4-34 System Features

Features

You can use a “wild card” character to indicate that you want calls to an
exchange restricted in every area code—for example, the 976 exchange in any
state. During system programming, a “pause” (entered using the Hold button)
indicates a wild card character; therefore, use the letter “p” to indicate that a wild
card character should be programmed.
,
You can design up to eight lists with a maximum of 10 numbers. Each number
can have up to 11 digits—for example, a leading 1 (if a toll prefix is required for
dialing) followed by the area code and telephone number. Once you have
designed the lists, decide which telephones to restrict. You can assign each
telephone to one to eight lists.
Note: Users cannot dial a number on an Allowed List if it matches a number on
a Disallowed List assigned to the telephone.

Planning Form Instructions
On PBX System Form 6h, Disallowed Lists:
1. Write the name of the list in the space next to the list number.
2. Write the disallowed area codes and/or exchanges in the column (a
maximum of 10 entries per list).
Use the wild card charactor ("p") to restrict an exchange from being
dialed in any area code. For example, to prevent users from directly
dialing the 976 exchange in any area code, write "1ppp976."

See ‘Remote Access’ in Chapter 3.

3. Write the extension numbers of the telephones that you want to assign to
the list in the "Disallow To Ext. Nos." column. (Refer to Form 2a.)
If you planned Remote Access and want to restrict callers through
Disallowed Lists, locate PBX System Form 3a, Outside Trunks - Remote
Access.
On page 3, "Class of Restriction without Barrier Codes":
4. Write the list numbers under the heading "Disallowed List Access" (for
either or both tie and non-tie trunks).
On all copies of page 4, "Class of Restriction with Barrier Codes":
5. Write the list nubmers under the heading "Disallowed List Access" (for
each barrier code).
Note: Disallowed List Class of Restriction assignments apply to all Remote
Access users and cannot be assigned on an individual basis.

System Features 4-35

Features

Night Service
Use these instructions only if Night Service is used for after-hours
telephone operation.
Night Service offers three options for after-hours telephone operation. Choose
any combination of these options:
■ Night

Service with Group Assignment

■ Night

Service with Outward Restriction

■ Night

Service with Time Set

Mark PBX System Forms 7a through 7C to show your option choices.

Night Service with Group The Night Service with Group Assignment option allows you to assign all the
calls or trunks associated with a particular operator position to a Night Service
Assignment
group. This makes it easier for users to answer after-hours calls.
Any call that comes in to the operator console while Night Service is in effect
rings immediately at each available telephone in the group. Calls ring
immediately even on trunks set for delayed ring or no ring.
You can create up to eight Night Service groups, one for each operator. There is
no limit to the number of telephones assigned to each group, and each
telephone can be assigned to more than one group.
Planning Form Instructions
Mark PBX System Form 7a, Night Service - Group Assignment.
Note: Form 7a has two sides and holds information for up to eight
operators.
In each column:
1. Write the extension number for the operator whose calls are being
answered in the "Operator Ext. No." space. (Refer to Form 2a.)
2. Write the extension number for each member of the group in the "Ext. No."
column. (Refer to Form 2a.)
3. Write each group member's name in the "Name" column. (Refer to
Form 2a.)

Night Service with
Outward Restriction

4-36 System Features

The Night Service with Outward Restriction option allows you to set up the
system so that only authorized users can place non-emergency calls when
Night Service is in effect. This prevents unauthorized after-hours use of
telephones.

Features

When you select this option, people who need to make calls after hours must
first enter a password. People who do not know the password can dial only
emergency numbers that you specify, such as the telephone numbers for the
police and fire departments. Calls to non-emergency numbers do not go
through unless the password is entered first. You can include up to 10
telephone numbers on the Night Service Emergency Allowed List. Each number
can have a maximum of 12 digits.
Once you specify that a password is required, the password applies to all
telephones in the system when Night Service is activated at any operator
position.
If users need to make after-hours calls and prefer not to enter a password, you
can set up an Exclusion List that excludes those users from the password
requirement. Telephones assigned to the Exclusion List keep the normal call
restrictions, if any are assigned, when Night Service is in effect. However, these
telephones are not protected in any other way from unauthorized after-hours
use.
Planning Form Instructions
On PBX System Form 7b, Night Service - Outward Restriction:
1. Write the password in the "Password" space. The password must be four
digits and can include the number 0 to 9 in any combination.
Note: To keep the password private, do not fill in the blank.
2. Write the nubers to be included in the list under "Telephone No." In the
"Emergency Allowed List" section.
To exclude users from the password requirement, complete the "Exclusion
List" section:
3.

Write the extension number for each telephone in the "Ext. No." column.
(Refer to Form 2a.)

4 . Write each user's name in the "Name" column. (Refer to Form 2a.)

Night Service with Time
Set

The Night Service with Time Set option allows you to set the system to
automatically turn Night Service on and off at the times and days of the week
you specify. This ensures that after-hours calls are handled properly even if an
operator forgets to turn on Night Service.
Operators can still override the timer and turn Night Service on or off manually.
The feature can also be deactivated through system programming for special
conditions, such as a mid-week holiday.

System Features 4-37

Features
Planning Form Instructions
On PBX System Form 7c, Night Service - Time Set, write the time of day
you want Night Service truned on and off for each day of the week.
Use 24-hour number, called military time - for example, 5:30 pm = 1730.
If Night Service is to remain on throught the day - for example, on
Sunday - don't enter an on and off time.

Labeling
Labeling enhances the capability of display telephones used with the system.
Choose the labels to appear on display telephones:
Trunks
Stations and Calling Groups
Posted Message
System Directory/System Speed Dial
Trunks

Trunk labels identify the trunk being used or the department being called. For
example, when a call comes in on one of the incoming trunks, a number, such
as 5559876, or the name of the department to which it belongs, such as Sales,
is displayed. Used with the AT&T INF02 automatic number identification (ANI)
service, the labels also identify the number of the caller.
Note: The availability of the caller identification information may be limited by
local-serving (caller’s) jurisdiction, availability, or central office equipment.
The labels can contain up to seven characters, including capital letters,
numbers, ampersand (&), dash (–), space, colon (:), asterisk (*), and pound
sign (#).
Planning Form Instructions
On PBX System Form 8a, Label Form - Trunks, in the "Label" column:
Write the label for each trunk next to its trunk number.

Stations and Calling Groups

When the system is first set up, users with display telephones see only the
extension number of the person calling them for inside calls, calling group calls,
transfer returns, and Leave Word Calling messages.
You can associate alphanumeric labels with extension numbers so that both the
name of the caller and the extension number are displayed. For example, you
might assign the label “TERRY” to extension number 20. Then users with display
telephones can see that they have incoming calls from Terry at extension 20 or
that Terry at extension 20 has left “call me” messages. The labels can contain up
to seven letters and/or numbers.

4-38 System Features

Features

Planning Form Instructions
Review PBX System Forms 2a, System Numbering - Station Jacks and
6e, Group Calling and determine the labels needed.
On PBX System Form 8b, Label Form - Stations and Calling Groups:

Posted Message

Write the extension number for each telephone and calling group in the
"Ext. No." column.

Write the label to be displayed for each telephone and calling group in
the "Label" column.

Posted Message allows users to post a message telling callers who have
display telephones why they cannot answer.
There can be as many as 20 messages. The 10 messages shown on Form 8C
are already programmed in the system. Ten others can be added, and the
original 10 can be changed.
Posted messages can contain as many as 16 characters, including capital
letters, numbers, ampersand (&), dash (–), space, colon (:), asterisk (*), and
pound sign (#).
Planning Form Instructions
On PBX System Form 8c, Label Form - Posted Message:
1.

To add posted messages, write each new message next to its message
number (11 through 20) in the "Label" column.

2 . To change existing messages, cross out the message and write the new
message in the "Revised Standard Message" column.
System Directory/
System Speed Dial

Users may dial certain numbers frequently, such as the numbers of clients,
suppliers, or branch offices. You can assign and store up to 130 four-character
System Speed Dial codes with a large processor module, and up to 40 with the
small processor module. To call these numbers, users simply dial the
4-character codes—a pound [#] sign or the Feature button followed by three
digits.
Assign System Speed Dial codes to telephone numbers that shouldn’t be
displayed on telephones, such as numbers that contain access codes. You can
also assign labels to the System Speed Dial codes. These labels are listed in the
System Directory so that MLX telephone users can search for them and dial
System Speed Dial numbers with the touch of a button.

System Features 4-39

Features

Planning Form Instructions
Review the analyis of question 9 on the Employee Communicaton Survey
On PBX System Form 8d, System Speed Dial and System Directory:
1 . Check "No" in the "Display" column if you do not want the number
displayed.
2 . Write each telephone number in the "Telephone Number" column.
3 . Write the label to be displayed for the number in the "Label" column.

Automatic Route Selection
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) allows you to make the most efficient use of
trunks connected to the system, which can mean significant savings for your
business. Routing calls efficiently is especially important if the business has
several different types of trunks, such as local, WATS, FX (foreign exchange), or
tie, or uses an alternate long-distance company. If the system is pooled, you
can use ARS to specify which trunk pool should be used for each call, based on
the telephone number the caller dials.
How ARS Works

To use ARS, the user selects a System Access Ring, System Access Voice, or
System Access Originate Only button and begins dialing an outside call by
entering the ARS access code (usually a 9) followed by the phone number. The
call is then ‘routed” over a trunk pool that you have determined to be most cost
effective. Calls are sent over a preferred route (Route 1 ) when possible,
generally chosen because of lower cost. If all trunks in that route are busy, up to
five alternate routes (Route 2, Route 3, etc.) can be specified to complete the
call. If all the designated routes are busy, the system notifies the user with a
fast-busy tone. The user can then place a request for the busy trunk using the
Automatic Callback feature.
Note: With ARS, users must dial “1” before dialing any 7- or 10-digit toll number,
even if the local telephone company does not require dialing a toll prefix.
The set of preferred and alternate routes to be used for a particular call is
determined by the ARS table ‘routing pattern” associated with that call’s
destination. The system lets you define up to 16 ARS tables (each with two
subpatterns based on time of day). Four additional tables are factory set and
are designed to save programming time.
ARS performs specific checks to ensure that the user has the appropriate
permissions for making each call (including a check for Allowed and Disallowed
List assignment). First, the dialed number is checked to see if it is an emergency
number, for example, fire, police. If so, the call is placed over the main pool,
regardless of any restrictions. If it is not an emergency call, the permissions are
checked for any call restrictions (outside or toll). Finally, each route and each
telephone is assigned an ARS Facility Restriction Level (FRL). Users are allowed
access to particular routes in particular routing patterns only if their individual
telephone’s FRL is greater than or equal to the route’s FRL.

4-40 System Features

Features

In this section, you will define a set of ARS tables. This set includes a list of area
codes and exchanges associated with each table, the preferred and alternate
routes (if any) for each subpattern, and the FRL for each route. As you become
more familiar with the calling patterns of your company, and with the intricacies
of ARS, you may want to change these patterns to suit your particular
installation.
Note: It is recommended that all systems operating in PBX mode use ARS,
even if only central office trunks are available. This provides additional flexibility
for future upgrading of facilities and allows predesignated emergency calls to
be put through regardless of restrictions placed on a station.
ARS Worksheet

Fill out the Automatic Route Selection Worksheet (PBX System Form 9a)to
decide how to best route calls. Use PBX System Form 3b, Outside Trunks —
Pools to review the types of trunk pools available.
Planning Form Instructions
1. Record the number of exchanges in the local calling area in the blank at
the top of Form 9a. If you aren't sure how many exchanges there are,
consult your telephone directory.
2. Enter the number of each of the trunk pools (factory setting is 70 or 890 899) in the "Trunk Pool Number" column.
Note: If you have renumbered the trunk pools, check the "Renumber To"
column for Form 3b for the trunk pool extension numbers.
Some trunk pools, such as in-state WATS trunk pools, can be used for
both toll and local calls. (Note that with ARS a local call is any call that
doesn't require dialing a 1.) If people will use a particular trunk pool for
both toll and local calls, enter the number of that trunk pool in the
worksheet twice, and note the reason.
For example, McHale and Associates is based in Denver, Colorado (303
area code). McHale has a local trunk pool, an in-state WATS pool, and a
cross-country WATS pool. Because Colorado has two area codes, 303
and 719, the in-state WATS trunk can be used for both toll and local calls.
Therefore, there are two entries for Pool 890 on the ARS Worksheet.
Figure 4-1 shows the completed Automatic Route Selection Worksheet for the
fictitous company McHale and Associates of Denver, Colorado. you may find it
useful to consult the illustration as you fill out the worksheet.

System Features 4-41

Features

Number of Area Codes or Exchanges
Trunk Pool No.

Trunk Type

*T= Toll, L=Local
Preferred trunk pool for toll calls (Table 17)
Preferred trunk pool for locl calls (Table 18)
Figure 4-1 Completed ARS Worksheet

4-42 System Features

Type of Dial* for which Trunk Pool is Used

Features

Planning Form Instructions - Continued
For each trunk pool number entered:
3. Record the type of trunk (local, FX, regional WATS, etc.) in the pool in the
"Trunk Type" column.
4. Write the appropriate letter, T (toll) or L (local), in the "Type of Dial"
column for the type of call that should be dialed on each trunk pool:
■

T = Toll: Any call that has a series of digits that begins with a 1,
followqed by an exchanged or area code. When placing a toll call using
ARS, callers dial 11 digits (1 + 3 [area code] + 3 [exchange] + 4 [last
four digits of the number]) or 8 digits (1 + 3 [exchange] + 4 [last four
digits og the number]).
Keep in mind that callers must dial 1 before dialing the area code,
even if they don't normally need to dial a toll prefix to make a toll call.
Users who dial eight digits may want to avoid the delay while the
system makes sure all digits are dialed by dialing a # after the eighth
digit. This signals the system that all digits are dialed.

■

L + Local: Any call that does not fall under the definition of toll. This
includes both 7-digit dialing and 1 + 7-digit dialing still required in
some areas.

5 . Enter the total number of different area codes or exchanges that the pool
should serve in the "Number of Area Codes or Exchanges for which Trunk
Pool is Used" column.
If you don't know the exact number of exchanges or area codes, enter a
note such as "All area codes in the U.S. except the 15 served by the
regional WATS trunks." Keep in mind that you're recording how many
different area codes or exchanges the pool should access, not the area
codes or exchanges themselves.
This step helps identify the preferred trunk pools for toll and local calls.
(Preferred pools are the trunk pools on which the system places each call
unless a different route has been specified for that particular type of call.)
Under the "Preferred Trunk Pools" heading:
6 . Determine which of the toll tunk pools is used for calls to the greatest
number of different area codes. Write the number of that trunk pool in the
space next to "Toll Calls."
In Figure 4-1, the cross-country WATS trunk pool serves the greatest
number of different area codes, every are code in the country except the
two area codes in Colorado. Therefore, it is the preferred trunk pool for toll
calls.
7 . Determine which of the local trunk pools is used for calls to the greatest
number of different exchanges. Write the number of that trunk pool in the
sopace next to "Local Calls."
In the example, Figure 4-1, the in-state WATS trunk pool serves the
greatest number of different exchanges. It is the preferred trunk pool for
calls to every exchange in area code 303 except the 20 exchanges in the
local calling area. Therefore, it is the preferred trunk pool for local calls
Note: Table 17 and 18 will be explained later.
System Features 4-43

Features

About ARS Tables

You’ll use the information you recorded on the worksheet to prepare the ARS
tables on PBX System Forms 9b and 9c. When your system is programmed for
ARS, the information from these forms is entered into ARS tables stored in the
system. The system can have as many as 20 ARS tables—16 are programmed
and 4 are factory set (dial zero, special number, default local, and default toll
tables).
Tables 1 through 16
You can set up as many as 16 tables to route calls to specific area codes and
exchanges for which your business has economical trunk pools, such as in-state
or regional WATS, FX, or tie-trunk pools. The best route for a call is determined
by matching the telephone numbers dialed with the programmed tables of area
codes, exchanges, and other numbers.
There are four possible types of programmable tables:
■

6-Digit

■

Area Code

■

Exchange

■

1 + 7

6-Digit Tables. For some businesses the cost of toll calls to telephone numbers
in another area code varies according to the exchange the caller dials. The
system may be set up to place calls to numbers in a particular area code on
different trunk pools, depending on the exchange to which the call is placed. On
the tables used to route these calls, an area code is the first entry and the
remaining entries are exchanges within the area code. The system scans the
first six digits of the number that was dialed (the area code and the exchange)
to route the call.
Area Code Tables. Many businesses use only one type of trunk, such as a
regional WATS trunk, for all calls placed to a particular area code. These calls
are routed according to tables that associate the area code with the preferred
pool. The system scans only the area code of the number being dialed to route
the call.

Exchange Tables. In-state WATS trunks are used to make calls to a particular
exchange within an area code. These calls are routed according to tables that
associate the exchange with the preferred trunk pool. The system scans only the
exchange of the number being dialed to route the call.
1 + 7 Tables. In some areas, callers must dial a 1 and 7-digit number to call
certain exchanges even though the call is within the area code. The 1 + 7
Tables contain lists of all the exchanges that require dialing a 1 plus 7 digits.
For these areas, the ARS 1 + 7 Dial setting must be programmed to “within area
code.’ This setting specifies that 1 + 7-Digit Tables must be checked when a
user dials a 1 and 7 digits. In the areas where the local telephone company
does not require that the caller dial a 1, the ARS 1 + 7 Dial setting must be set to
“not within area code.” With this setting, the user is not required to dial the
leading 1; however, the system adds the 1 to the dialed number to allow proper
routing using the ARS tables.
4-44 System Features

Features

Note: If the local telephone company requires a 1 to be dialed before placing
calls to some 7-digit numbers, setting up 1 + 7 Tables speeds up call
processing. However, users need to be instructed to dial the 1 if these tables
are programmed and the ARS 1 + 7 Dial setting is set to “within area code.”
Users have two options for placing calls to 1 + 7-digit numbers:
■

Users can dial 1, dial the 7-digit number, and wait for ARS to recognize after
a time-out delay that no more digits are being dialed.

■

Users can dial 1, dial the 7-digit number, and then press #. When the dialing
sequence is ended with a #, the system knows that the user is finished
dialing and eliminates the time-out delay.

Tables 17 and 18, the Default Tables
There are two default tables, one for toll calls and the other for local calls. These
tables minimize the time it takes to plan and program ARS because you don’t
have to record the area codes and exchanges.
■

Table 17, Default Toll Table, routes toll calls to all area codes that aren’t listed
in Tables 1 through 16.

■

Table 18, Default Local Table, routes local calls to all exchanges that aren’t
listed in Tables 1 through 16.

Tables 19 and 20, the Special Number Tables
The Dial O Table (number 19) routes calls when a user dials O. If the
international dial code 011 is not included in any other table, calls are routed
via the Dial O Table. You can specify the route to which dial O calls should be
routed.
The N11 Table (number 20) routes calls to these numbers: 411,611, 811,
and 911. These calls are always placed on the main pool (the factory-set
pool access code is 70).
ARS Table Matching

To place a call in a system that has ARS, a user dials a dial-out code (usually
a 9) followed by the telephone number. The system determines the best route
for the call by checking the telephone number dialed against the numbers
(digits) in the ARS tables. ARS eliminates the tables until it finds one containing
a match.
For example, if a user dials O, ARS eliminates all tables except the dial zero
table and places the call using that table’s programmed routes.
If a user dials 1-202-555-1234, ARS recognizes that it is a toll call (a 1 followed
by 10 digits) and therefore eliminates all exchange tables.
ARS then checks the Area Code Tables and 6-Digit Tables for a match. If it finds
a match on a 6-Digit Table, it checks the Area Code Tables for a match and
routes the call. If a match is not found on any of the programmed Area Code or
6-Digit Tables, the call is routed according to the Default Toll Table.

System Features 4-45

Features

Table Planning Forms

Because of the complexity of ARS routing, the instructions for filling out the
planning forms are presented a few steps at a time with examples of completed
forms shown after each group of steps. The instructions begin with the
programmable tables (1 through 16) and introduce the factory-set tables
midway through the completion process.
Locate PBX System Forms 9b, Automatic Route Selection Tables and 9c,
Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables.Complete
Form 9b for each trunk pool listed on the ARS worksheet (Form 9a).
Planning Form Instructions
On each copy of Form 9b:
1. Write the table number in the "Table No." space (maximum 16). Start with
1 and number sequentially.
2. Check the appropriate box under the "Type of Table" heading: 6-Digit,
Area Code, Exchange, or 1 + 7.
If this is a 1 + 7 Table:
■

Check "not within area code" if users do not need to dial a 1 to each
numbers within their own area code.

■

Check "within area code" if users need to dial a 1 to reach numbers
within their own area code.

3 . Complete the section of the form headed "Area Code/Exchanges":
■

If this is a 6-Digit Table, write the area code on the blank line next to
entry 001. Then write each exchange in that area code that people
would call on the numbered lines, beginning with the entry 002.
Up to 99 exchanges can be listed in any oreder. If you need to list
more area codes or exchanged, prepare antoher 6-Digit table.

■

If this is an Area Code, Exchange, or 1 + 7 Table, write the area codes
or exchanges on the numbered lines, beginning with the entry 001.
Up to 100 area codes or exchanges can be listed in any order,
but area codes and exchanges cannot be on the same table.

Note: The digits before the blank lines represent the table entry number
used while programming.
Example one: If a business plans to use Table 1 to route calls to exchanges
333, 444, and 523 in area code 816, the upper section of the completed
Form 9b will look similar to the one shown in Figure 4-2.

4-46 System Features

Features

PBX System Form 9b
Automatic Route Selection Tables
Maximum: 16 Tables. Make copy for each table.

Table No.

Type of Table
✔ 6-Digit
❑
❑ Area Code
❑ Exchange
❑ 1 + 7, dialing from
❑ not within area code ●
❑ within area code
Area Code/Exchanges

Figure 4-2 Example One, PBX System Form 9b

System Features 4-47

Features

Example two: If the business plans to use Table 7 to route calls to the
northeastern (band 1 ) WATS trunks as entries 001 through 015, the upper
section of the completed form will look similar to the one shown in Figure 4-3.

PBX System Form 9b

Figure 4-3 Example Two, PBX System Form 9b

4-48 System Features

Features

Subpatterns
For each table (1 through 16, and the factory-set tables 17 and 18), you can
select two subpatterns that specify routes that should be used depending on
the time of day. You can specify up to six routes for each subpattern. For
example, you may want calls to certain area codes routed over WATS trunks
during the day, and after 11 p.m., when toll rates are less expensive on basic
trunks, you may want the calls routed over the main pool.
Preferred and Alternate Routes
Pools. The column with the ‘Pool” heading is used to list the trunk pools you
want to use to route calls made to the area codes and/or exchanges listed in the
"Area Codes/Exchange" section. You can specify up to six alternate routes for
each subpattern.
Facility Restriction Level (FRL). The FRL is a number between O and 6 that
is used to restrict user access to the route. You begin by assigning a value to
each route you list in the ‘Pool” section. A value of O is the least restrictive, and a
value of 6 is the most restrictive. The factory setting is 3.
Assign a value of O, for example, for local calls. This makes the assigned routes
available to all users. Assign a value of 1 through 6 according to any restrictions
you plan for certain facilities. For example, if you want to limit use of a particular
pool of WATS trunks only to top executives, assign an FRL of 6 for the route.
Note: You will assign an FRL value to telephones and Remote Access trunks
that corresponds to the route FRL that determines whether the user can make
calls using a particular route.
Other Digits. Extra digits or special characters maybe required so the system
can route a call on a particular trunk pool. For example, some companies use an
alternate long-distance company for calls to certain area codes. Accessing the
alternate long-distance company requires dialing the number, waiting for a dial
tone, and then dialing six more digits and waiting for the dial tone again. The
pauses and extra digits can be automatically added to numbers dialed in the
area codes listed on the table by specifying them in the ‘Other Digits’ column.
Digit Absorption. The column labeled ‘Absorb’ specifies how many, if any, of
the digits dialed by the caller should be absorbed (not dialed) by the system
when it places these calls. This ensures that the business gets the full benefit
from any special-purpose trunks such as FX and tie. You include the number of
digits to absorb (0-11, starting with the first digit) in the tables so the system
can route all appropriate calls to these lower-cost pools.
Digit absorption doesn’t interfere with Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
or Call Restriction. The digits dialed by the caller are recorded on SMDR reports
and are checked to be sure the call is allowed.

System Features 4-49

Features

The factory-set value for digit absorption is O, which means the system places a
call using all the digits that the caller dialed. The values 1–11 tell the system not
to dial a certain number of digits, starting with the first digit dialed by the caller.
If you want the system to absorb a leading 1, assign a value of 1. If you want the
system to absorb a leading 1 and the area code, assign a value of 4, and so
forth.
For example, a branch office in Albuquerque, New Mexico, has a tie-trunk pool
to company headquarters in San Diego, California. The complete telephone
number at headquarters is an 11-digit number, 1 + the area code + the
exchange + the 4-digit number. People in the branch office dial all 11 digits, but
the system dials only the last 4 digits to place these calls. This happens
because an absorb value of 7 was assigned with the tie-trunk pool in the ARS
table that routes calls to this area code and exchange. The absorption value of 7
in the table tells the system to absorb the 1, the area code, and the exchange,
so the call can be placed on one of the tie trunks.
Planning Form Instructions - Continued
In the "Subpattern" sections on Form 9b and Form 9c:
4. To direct calls differently according to time of day, write a time for each
subpattern in the "Time of Day" space (for example, 8 a.m.).
5. To complete the "Pool" column for each subpattern, write the number of
the preferred trunk pool next to the number 1. This is the pool on which
calls to the area codes or exchanges listed in the "Area Code/Exchanges"
section of this form should be placed.
If you want to designate a backup pool in case all the trunks in the firstchoice pool are busy, write the number of the backup trunk pool next to
the number 2, and so on.
6. To complete the "FRL" column, enter a value of 0-6, which determines the
Facility Restriction Level for users. The least restrictive is 0, and 6 is the
most restrictive. Assign a value of 0 if you want all users to access the
route and 1-6 to restrict calling for the route to specific users only.
Subpattern Example:The form for a typical Area Code Table, illustrated in
Figure 4-4, shows a table to route calls to the 13 area codes served by the
northeastern (band 1) WATS lines beginning at 8 a.m. with no restrictions. The
number of the northeastern WATS pool, 891, is on the first line in the "Subpattern
A" section. The time, 8:00 a.m., is in the "Time of Day" space, and a FRL of 0
indicates no restrictions, The 11 p.m. in the "Time of Day" space for Subpattern
B and Pool 70 in the ‘Pool’ column indicates that calls to these area codes are to
be routed over the main pool after 11 p.m.

4-50 System Features

Features

Figure 4-4 Subpattern Example

System Features 4-51

Features

Because calls to the 15 area codes shown on Figure 4-4 should be placed on
the cross-country WATS trunks if all the northeastern WATS trunks are busy, the
number of the cross-country WATS pool, 890, is used in both cases. An FRL of 4
is assigned to restrict some users from using the cross-country WATS trunks.
Planning Form Instructions - Cotinued
7. Extra digits may be required for the system to place a call on a particular
pool. If so, enter the digits (0-9) in the same row as the pool number, in
the column headed "Other Digits."
These special accress or account codes can range from a single digit,
such as 9, to a maximum of 20 digits.
Extra Digit Example: If a business uses an alternate long-distance company for
calls to nine area codes in Canada, accessing the alternate long-distance
company lines requires getting a local line and dialing seven digits. The
completed form for the Area Code Table that routes these calls to the alternate
long-distance company lines is shown in Figure 4-5.

4-52 System Features

Features

PBX System Form 9b
Automatic Route Selection Tables
Maximum: 16 Tables. Make copy for each tab/e.

Table No.

Type of Table

❑ 6-Digit
Area Code

❑ Exchange
❑ 1 + 7, dialing from
❑ not within area code ●
❑ within area code
Area Code/Exchanges
021
001
022
002
023
003
024
004
025
005
026
006
027
007
028
008

041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049

009
010

Subpattern B Time of Day

Subpattern A Time of Day
Pool

FRL ◆

Other Digits

081
082
083
084
085
086
087

061
062
063
064
065
066
067

Pool

Absorb

FRL ◆

Absorb

Other Digits

5
6

6
◆ Factory setting
FRL setting is 3.
Figure 4-5 Extra Digit Example

System Features 4-53

Features

Planning Form Instructions - Continued
8 . If the system must absorb certain digits dialed by users to plance calls on
a particular pool, enter the appripriate absorption numbner in the same
row as the pool number, in the column headed "Absorb."
Assign a value of 0 if you do not want absorption. Assign a value of 1-11
according to the number of digits you want absorbed, starting with the
first digit dialed.
Example: If a company has FX trunks for the 686 exchange in the 901 area
code and wants to allow people to dial those calls the same way they dial toll
calls to other area codes, an absorption number of 4 is assigned to the FX trunk
pool, Pool 893. The completed form for the 6-Digit Table that routes calls to the
FX trunk pool is shown in Figure 4-6.

4-54 System Features

Features

PBX System Form 9b
Automatic Route Selection Tables
Maximum: 16 Tables. Make copy for each table.
Table No.
Type of Table
6-Digit
Area Code
❑ Exchange
❑ 1 + 7, dlalmg from
❑ not wlthin area code +
❑ w!thin area code

Area Code/Exchanges
001
021
002
022
003
023
004
024
005
025
006
026
007
027
008
028
009
029
010
030
011
031

041

061

081

042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051

062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071

082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090

012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020

052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060

072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080

032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040

Subpattern A Time of Day
Pool

1
2
3
4
5
6

—
—
—
—
—

FRL ◆

Other Digits

—
—

—
—
_

091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100

Subpattern B Time of Day
Absorb

Pool

1
2
3
4
5
6

1 — —
2 — —
3

FRL ◆

—

4 —
5 —
6 —

—

—
—
—

Other Digits

Absorb

1
2
3
4
5
6

_
_
_
_
_
_

◆ Factory

setting.
FRL setting IS 3.

Figure 4-6 Digit Absorption Example

System Features 4-55

Features
After ARS is programmed, people in the Figure 4-6 company dial 1 + 901 + 686
XXXX to make these calls. The system absorbs the leading 1 and the area code
and dials only the 7-Digit number to place these calls on one of the FX trunks.

Planning Form Instructions - Continued
9. If you have worked only one of your planned nondefault tables, complete
all copies of Form 9b. Repeat steps 1 through 8 for each table (tables 1
through 16) that you need.
10. If you haven't completed the factory-set tables, do so now.
■

For tables 17 and 18, repeat steps 4 through 8 to complete the
subpattern and pool routing sections.

■

For the Dial 0 table (number 19) complete the "Pool" routing, "FRL,"
and "Other Digits" entries following steps 5 through 7.

■

If users need to dial an access code to call the special numbers 411,
611, 811, and 911, record that code on the Special Number Table,
under the heading "Other Digits." Assign the FRL as shown in step 6.

11. If restricting stations and Remote Access users from specific routes,
locate all copies of pages 3 and 4 of Form 3a and Forms 4a through
5c.
■

Under the "Facility Restriction Level" heading on each telephon form,
write the value (0 to 6) you want to assign.

■

Under the "ARS Restriction Level" heading on pages 3 and 4 of Form
3a, check the value (0 to 6) you want to assign.
Station and Remote Access FRL values equal to or greater than the
FRL value assigned to routes allow users to access those routes.
A value of 0 is the most restrictive, and a value of 6 is the least
restrictive. The factory-set FRL value assigned to stations is 3.
(There is no factory-set Remote Access FRL.)
To restrict a station from specific routes, assign a FRL value to the
station that is lower than the route's value.
For example, if you want a telephone used by a top executive to have
unlimited use of any ARS route, assign a value of 6. If you want to limit
a user from making calls on pools with special-use trunks such as
WATS, assign a value of 0.

4-56 System Features

Modifications

To modify the system:
■

Decide what you want to change and identify the programming needed.

■

Complete (or revise) the appropriate PBX System Planning Forms.

■

Program the modification using Chapter 3 of System Programming.

This chapter presents a series of steps, which describe
■

the actions you must take to add to the system

■

the interrelated options or features you should consider

■

the forms that must be revised or completed

References to the relevant sections of this and other books, where detailed
instructions can be found, are included.

Preparation
Collect your file of PBX System Planning Forms. Although you may need to
revise only one or two forms, it is suggested that you have all completed forms
available for reference.
Note: If you need clean copies of the forms, see Appendix A of this book.
Review Chapter 1 for details on
preparation for planning activities.

Before revising the PBX System Forms, analyze and document the modification
planned. As examples:
■ If

adding stations to your system, adjust your Floor Plan to show the location
of the new telephones and the kind of equipment to be used.

■ If

activating a feature such as System Speed Dial, survey employees to
identify the numbers that should be programmed into the Speed Dial file.

Preparation 5-1

Modifications

Adding to the System
Adding to the system is defined as increasing its capacity or capability. This
increase may mean adding more or different kinds of trunks, connecting
auxiliary equipment, or installing more stations (telephones, consoles or tip/ring
equipment).
Step 1

Determine the specific type of trunk, auxiliary equipment, or station to be added.
Use Table 5-1, shown on the opposite page, to determine the type of trunk
and/or station module needed to support what you plan to add.

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Locate PBX System Form 1, System Planning. Review the completed “Control
Unit Diagram’ on the back of the form and determine if the module type needed
is present.
■

If the module is not in the control unit, continue to step 4.

■

If the module type needed is already in the control unit, continue to step 3.

Determine if there are jacks available on the module for the new trunk, auxiliary
equipment, or station. Use PBX System Form 2a, System Numbering —
Station Jacks, or PBX System Form 2c, System Numbering — Trunk Jacks,
to identify jack availability.
■

If there are sufficient jacks available on an existing module, plan to connect
the added trunk, equipment, or station to them. Continue to step 5.

■

If there aren’t jacks available, continue to step 4.

Plan the placement of the new module required to support the trunk, auxiliary
equipment or station. Review the guidelines that follow and decide where the
new module should be placed.
■

The power supply module must be placed in the far left slot of each carrier.

■

The processor module must be installed in slot O of the basic carrier.

■

Trunk and/or station modules can be placed in any order in slots 1 through
17 (with two expansion carriers), with the following conditions:
■

■

✘

5-2 Adding to the System

Install the modules in each carrier from left to right with no empty slots
between modules.
If the system includes a queued call console, the 008 MLX module that
supports it must be the first station module in the control unit.
Place all 012 and 008 OPT modules in the same carrier whenever
possible.
Group all 800 DID, 100D, and tie modules together whenever possible.

Modifications

Table 5-1 Required Trunk and/or Station Modules
100
D

400
EM

4 0 0

400 800
G S / DID
LS/
TTR

8 0 0

008 800 0 0 8 008 0 1 2 4 0 8 408
OPT GS/
MLX
GS/
L S
L S

Loop-start trunks
Ground-start trunks
Tie trunks
Direct Inward Dial trunks
T1

facilities

Emulated loop-start trunks
Emulated ground-start trunks
Emulated tie trunks
ISDN-PRI services
Remote

Access

Loudspeaker paging
Maintenance

alarm

Music-on-Hold
Digital/ISDN (MLX) direct-line console
Queued call console
Analog direct-line console
Digital/ISDN(MLX) telephone
Analog multiline telephone
Tip/Ring equipment
Off-premises telephone

Notes:
DS1 facilities configured for T1 operation provide 24 channels.
■
If planning Remote Access, at least one module with touch-tone receivers must be installed.
■
If you use-equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials, you may be required to obtain a
copyright license from, and pay license fees to, a third party such as the American Society of Composers,
Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI). Or, you can purchase a Magic on
Hold system, which does not require you to obtain such license, from AT&T or your authorized dealer.
■
If analog multiline telephones require either Simultaneous Voice and Data or Voice Announce to Busy, two
consecutive station jacks are required.
■
If connecting tip/ring equipment to the 008 MLX module, an MFM is required.
■
If connecting tip/ring equipment to the 008, 408, or 408 GS/LS modules, a GPA is required.
■

Adding to the System 5-3

Modifications

Placing additional modules in the control unit calls for a recalculation of unit
loads. See System Reference for instructions.

step 5

5-4 Adding to the System

■

If the control unit has an available slot to the right, and the guidelines permit
placement there, continue to step 5.

■

If you must rearrange existing modules to accommodate the new one,
continue to step 6.

Revise or complete the required PBX System Planning Form(s) according to the
directions shown in Tables 5-2,5-3, and 5-4.

Modifications

Table 5-2 Adding New Trunks
If adding
See Chapter 3, “Trunk Connections” and
“Trunk Options.”

Complete

Loop-start or
ground-start trunks

All columns of Form 2c, System
Numbering — Trunk Jacks

■

DS1 trunks

All columns of Form 2c, System
Numbering — Trunk Jacks and
Form 3c, Outside Trunks — DS1
Facility (100D Module)

■

Tie trunks

All columns of Form 2c, System
Numbering — Trunk Jacks and
Form 3d, Outside Trunks — Tie

■

DID trunks

All columns of Form 2c, System
Numbering — Trunk Jacks and
Form 3e, Outside Trunks — DID

■

Consider revisions to
outside trunks forms:
■
■

3a, Remote Access
3b, Pools

Consider revisions to feature
forms:
See Chapter

4, “Labeling” and
“Automatic Route Selection.’

■
●

8a, Label Form — Trunks
9a through 9c, Automatic
Route Selection

See Chapter 3, Trunk Assignment.”

Button Diagram on appropriate
copies of Forms 4a through 5b

See Chapter 4, “Remote Call Forward.."

If personal line is assigned,
consider Remote Call Forward
If making more additions to the system, continue to Table 5-3. When planning is
complete, continue to Chapter 3 of System Programming.
Table 5-3 Adding Auxiliary Equipment

See Chapter 3, Trunk Jack
Connections for Auxiliary Equipment.’

If adding

Complete

Maintenance Alarm
Music-on-Hold
Loudspeaker Paging

Form 2c, System
Numbering — Trunk Jacks

Adding to the System 5-5

Modifications

If making more additions to the system, continue to Table 5-4. When planning is
complete, continue to Chapter 3 of System Programming.
Table 5-4 Adding New Stations
If adding
See Chapter 2, lStation Jack
Connections” and, if appropriate,
‘system Numbering.”

■

New stations

See Chapter 3, "Trunk Assignmenta and
Chapter 4, ‘Features.’

Complete
All columns of Form 2a, System
Numbering — Station Jacks
Copy of appropriate telephone
Form 4a through 5C
Consider revisions to:
■

Group Assigned Features
(Forms 6b through 6e)

■

Allowed and Disallowed
List assignments (Forms 6g
and 6h)
Night Service assignments
(Forms 7a and 7b)

■

Operator console

Station Labels (Form 8b)

Consider revisions to:
■

Operator Features (Form 6a)

■

Extension Status assignment
(Form 6f)

Continue to Chapter 3 of System Programming.
Step 6

5-6 Adding to the System

If rearranging modules in the control unit, the numbering plan will revert to the
factory-set two-digit plan. You must then reprogram the system.
■

Collect a clean set of PBX System Planning Forms from Appendix A.

■

Locate the AT&T Equipment List, the local telephone company trunk
information list, the Floor Plan, and the analysis of the Employee
Communications Survey forms. If any of these materials has been revised,
you should have both the original and revised versions available.

■

Work through this book, starting at Chapter 2.

Forms

This appendix contains one copy of the Employee Communication Survey form
and one copy of all PBX System Planning Forms.
The forms are in numerical order and organized according to planning purpose
as shown below.
Table A-1 PBX System Forms
Used for Planning
Features and Calling
Privileges
Control Unit Assembly
and Operating Conditions

●

FOrm No.

N/A
1

Form Title

Employee Communication Survey

System Planning

System Component Numbering

2a
2b
2c
2d
2e ◆

System Numbering — Station Jacks .
System Numbering — Digital/lSDN Station Adjuncts
System Numbering — Trunk Jacks
System Numbering — Special Renumbers
Systems Technician’s Run Sheet

Outside Trunk Connections

3a
3b
3c
3d
3e

Outside Trunks — Remote Access
Outside Trunks — Pools
Outside Trunks — DS1 Facility (100D Module)
Outside Trunks — Tie
Outside Trunks — DID

Station Connections

4a
4b
4c
5a
5b
5c

Analog Multiline Telephone
Digital/lSDN (MLX) Telephone and MFM Adjunct
Tip/Ring Equipment
Direct-Line Console (DLC) — Analog
Direct-Line Console (DLC) — Digital/lSDN and MFM Adjunct
Queued Call Console (QCC)

Features for Operators

Optional Operator Features

Form 2e is used by installation personnel.

A-1

Forms

Table A-1 Continued
Used for Planning

Form No.

Form Title

Features for User Groups

6b
6c
6d
6e

Call Pickup Groups
Group Paging
Group Coverage
Group Calling

Features for System-Wide Use

6f
6g
6h
7a
7b
7c
8a
8b
8c
8d
9a
9b
9c

System Features
Allowed Lists
Disallowed Lists
Night Service — Group Assignment
Night Service — Outward Restriction
Night Service — Time Set
Label Form — Trunks
Label Form — Stations and Calling Groups
Label Form — Posted Message
System Speed Dial and System Directory
Automatic Route Selection Worksheet
Automatic Route Selection Tables
Automatic Route Selection Default and Special
Numbers Tables

A-2

Employee Communication Survey
Room

Name

Extension

Name of work group (Sales, Customer Service)
Please answer each question below.
1,

Do you regularly use any of the following outside lines? (Check any that apply)

❑
❑
❑
❑
2.

WATS
FX (foreign exchange)
Tie
None of the above or don’t know

Are your phone calls covered when you’re away from your desk?

❑ No
❑ Yes

Do you cover phone calls for co-workers when they are away from their desks?

❑ No
❑ Yes

For whom?

Which of those people should have a button on your phone used
exclusively for his or her calls?

When you are unable to cover calls, it is done by

Do you share the incoming call workload with others?

❑ No
❑ Yes

With whom?

5, Would you say your phone use is

❑ Heavy
❑ Average
❑ Light

Do you have a data terminal or personal computer at your workstation?

❑ No
❑ Yes

Do you expect to get one within the next year?
❑ No
❑ Yes
Do you have a modem or ISDN 7500B Data Module?
❑ No
❑ Yes

Do you use account codes for charge-back of calls?

❑ No
❑ Yes

Please list all the codes you use (attach another sheet if necessary):

Approximately how many times do you transfer calls?

Do you need to dial the same number over and over every day?

❑ No
❑ Yes

times/day

Please list these numbers:

10. Do you want to be able to pick up other people’s calls when you hear their phones ring?

❑ No
❑ Yes

Please list these people:

11. Do you want your phone number to appear on another person’s phone for screening, or covering calls, or
for other reasons?

❑ No
❑ Yes

Please list these people:

PBX System Form 1

System Planning

Size of Processor Module

❑ Small — maximum 24 trunks and/or 56 stations
❑ Large — maximum 80 trunks and/or 144 stations
Capacity
Trunks
Module
Type

Trunks
Supported
by Module

Number of
Modules

400

800

408

400 GS/LS/TTR

800 GS/LS

408GS/LS

400EM

800 DID

100D

24*

Total Trunks
by Module
T y p e

System Totals
* The 1000 module has one physical jack that supports 24 trunks

Stations
Module
Type

Physical
Jacks per
Module

Number of
Modules

Physical Jacks
by Module
Type

Station
Extensions
Assigned

008 MLX

008

408

408 GS/LS

012

008 OPT

( x4)*

Total Station
Extensions
Assigned

System Totals
* The 008 OPT module is assigned 12 extension numbers although there are only 8 physical station jacks.

PBX System Form 1, Continued

Control Unit Diagram
Unit Load Total

Unit Load Total

Auxiliary Power Required

❑ Yes
❑ No

System Operatinq Conditions
System Programming Console

Automatic Maintenance Busy

❑ No
❑ Logical ID

❑ Disable ●
❑ Enable

Ext. No.

Set System Mode

Set System Date

❑ Key ●
❑ Hybrid/PBX
❑ Behind Switch

❑ Yes
❑ No

● Factory Setting

Set System Time
❑ Yes
❑ No

PBX System Form 2a
System Numbering — Station Jacks
Renumber System

❑ 2-Digit ●
❑ Selected Extension Numbers
❑ 3-Digit
❑ Set Up Space
Logical
ID

Jack Type 2 - D i g i t
A D* B Ext.No. ◆

3-Digit
Ext.No.

Set Up
Space

Renumber
To

Person, Location, or Function

Shaded lines indicate possible operator positions.
*Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM or ISDN 7500B Data Module.
◆ Factory Setting

PBX System Form 2a, Continued
Logical
ID

Jack Type 2 - D i g i t
A

B Ext.No ◆

3-Digit
Ext.No.

Set Up
Space

Renumber
To

Shaded lines indicate possible operator positions.
*Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM or ISDN 7500B Data Module.
◆ Factory Setting
2

Person, Location, or Function

PBX System Form 2a, Continued
Logical
ID

Jack Type
A

D* B

2-Digit
Ext.No ◆

3-Digit
Ext.No.

Set Up
Space

Renumber
To

Person, Location, or Function

Shaded lines indicate possible operator positions.
*Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM or ISDN 7500B Data Module.
◆ Factory Setting
3

PBX System Form 2a, Continued
Logical
ID

Jack Type
A

2-Digit
B Ext.No. ◆

3-Digit
Ext.No

Set Up
Space

Renumber
T o

Shaded lines indicate possible operator positions,
*Use Form 2b for adjuncts connected via MFM or ISDN 7500B Data Module.
◆ Factory Setting
4

Person, Location, or Function

PBX System Form 2b
System Numbering — Digital/ISDN Station Adjuncts
Maximum: 127 Adjuncts
MFM
Factory-Set
Logical ID Extension No.

Renumber to SAA

T/R

Person, Location
M L X
Telephone Function, and Equipment
Type
7500B E x t . N o .

PBX System Form 2b, Continued
MFM
Logical ID

Factory-Set
Extension No,

Renumber To

SAA

T/R

7500B

MLX
Telephone
Ext. No.

Person, Location,
Function, and Equipment
Type

PBX System Form 2b, Continued
MFM
Logical ID

Factory-Set
Extension No.

Renumber To

SAA

T/R

7500B

MLX
Telephone
Ext. No.

Person, Location,
Function, and Equipment
Type

PBX System Form 2C
System Numbering — Trunk Jacks
Music-on-Hold, Logical ID

Source

Loudspeaker Page, Logical ID

Logical
ID

Jack Type
(LS,GS,
DID,Tie,
DS1)

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

Trunk
Number

Trunk Type
(Basic LS,
Basic GS,
WATS, FX, etc.)

Maintenance Alarm, Logical ID
Loop-Start Reliable Disconnect
❑ Yes

❑ No ◆

Telephone Number
or Equipment

Toll Prefix
QCC
Outmode
Not
Short Hold operator QCC
Rotary Needed for Disconnect
to
Queue
Dial
LD
Interval Receive Priority
Level
Calls
Yes No ◆ Yes No ◆ Yes No ◆ (No ◆ )
(4 ◆ )

801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836

● Factory Setting
1

PBX System Form 2c, Continued

Logical
I D

◆

Jack Type
Trunk Type
(LS,GS,
(Basic LS,
DID,Tie, Trunk Basic GS,
DS1) Number WATS,FX,etc.

Factory Setting

Toll Prefix
QCC
Outmode
N o t Short Hold Operator
Rotary Needed for Disconnect
to
Dial
LD Interval Receive
Telephone Number
Call
or Equipment Yes No ◆ Yes No ◆ Yes No ◆ (No ◆ )

QCC
Queue
Priority
Level
(4 ◆ )

PBX System Form 2d
System Numbering — Special Renumbers
Group Calling
(Form 6e)
Group ID

Factory-Set
Number

Pools
(Form 3b)
Description

Renumber To

770

771

890

772
773

Factory-Set
Number

I
r

Renumber To

I
I

891
892

774

893

894

I
I

896
897

775
776
777
778

779

898

780

899

781
Group Paging
(Form 6c)
Group ID

782
783

Factory-Set
Number

784

793
794

785
786

787

789

790
791

7920
7921

7922
7924
7925

799 -

Factory-Set
Number

Call Park (Form
6a)

Renumber To

I
I

882

I I

884

886

887

888

800

885

7928

Factory-Set
Number

883

7926
7927

Listed Directory
Number
(QCC Queue)

Page All

I
I

7923

795
796
797

788

Renumber To

Remote Access
Code (Form 3a)

Factory-Set
Number

Renumber To

889

PBX System Form 2e
System Technician’s Run Sheet
Logical
ID

Type

Wire
No.

Old Ext. New Ext.
No.
No.

Miscellaneous

Person, Location, or
Function

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

PBX System Form 2e, Continued
r

Logical
ID
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Type

Wire
No.

Old Ext. New Ext.
No.
No.

Miscellaneous

Person, Location, or
Function

PBX System Form 2e, Continued
Logical
ID

Type

Wire
No.

Old Ext. New Ext.
No.
No.

Miscellaneous

Person, Location, or
Function

39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

PBX System Form 2e, Continued
Logical
ID
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78

Type

Wire
No.

Old Ext. New Ext.
No.
No.

Miscellaneous

Person, Location, or
Function

qPBX System Form 2e, Continued
Logical
ID

Type

Wire
No.

Old Ext. New Ext.
No.
No.

Miscellaneous

Person, Location, or
Function

79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98

PBX System Form 2e, Continued
Logical
ID

Type

Wire
No.

Old Ext. New Ext.
No.
No.

99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
.
6

Miscellaneous

Person, Location, or
Function

PBX System Form 2e, Continued
Logical
ID

Type

Wire
No.

Old Ext. New Ext.
No.
No.

Miscellaneous

Person, Location, or
Function

119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
.
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138

PBX System Form 2e, Continued
Logical
ID
139
140
141
142
143
144

Type

Wire
No.

Old Ext. New Ext.
No.
No.

Miscellaneous

Person, Location, or
Function

PBX System Form 3a
Outside Trunks — Remote Access
DID and Tie Trunks

Barrier Codes for DID or Tie Trunks

Remote Access Code: 889
Renumber To

❑ Yes
❑ No

Automatic Callback
❑ Disable ◆
❑ Enable

❑ Yes
❑ No

Logical
ID

Trunk
No.

Barrier Codes for Non-Tie Trunks

DID or Tie
Trunk

Non-Tie
Trunk

Trunk Type and
Description

Shared

Dedicated

◆ Factory Setting
1

PBX System Form 3a, Continued
Logical
ID

Trunk
No.

DID or Tie
Trunk

Non-Tie
Trunk

Trunk Type and
Description

Shared

Dedicated

PBX System Form 3a, Continued
Class of Restriction without Barrier Codes
DID or Tie Trunks

Non-Tie Trunks

Restriction
❑ Outward Restrict ◆
❑ Unrestricted
❑ Toll Restrict
ARS Restriction Level
❑ 4
❑ 0
❑ 5
❑ 1
❑ 2
❑ 6
❑ 3◆
Allowed List Access
❑ List NOS. (1 -8)

Restriction
❑ Outward Restrict ◆
❑ Unrestricted
❑ Toll Restrict
ARS Restriction Level
❑ 4
❑ 0
❑ 5
❑ 1
❑ 6
❑ 2
❑ 3◆
Allowed List Access
❑ List NOS. (1 -8)

Disallowed List Access

❑ List Nos. (1 -8)

❑ List NOS. (1 -8)

◆ Factory Setting
3

PBX System Form 3a, Continued

Page

Class of Restriction with Barrier Codes

Barrier Code
Number
Digits

(4 digits, O-9)

Number
Digits

(4 digits, O-9)

Restriction
❑ Outward Restrict+
❑ Unrestricted
❑ Toll Restrict
ARS Restriction Level
❑ 0
❑ 4
❑ 1
❑ 5
❑ 2
❑ 6
❑ 3◆
Allowed List Access

Restriction
❑ Outward Restrict+
❑ Unrestricted
❑ Toll Restrict
ARS Restriction Level
❑ 0
❑ 4
❑ 5
❑ 1
❑ 6
❑ 2
❑ 3 ◆
Allowed List Access

List NOS. (1 -8)

Disallowed List Access

List NOS. (1 -8)

List ties. (1 -8)

Barrier Code
Number
Digits

Barrier Code
(4 digits, O-9)

Number
Digits

(4 digits, O-9)

Restriction
❑ Outward Restrict ◆
❑ Unrestricted
❑ Toll Restrict
ARS Restriction Level
❑ 0
❑ 4
❑ 1
❑ 5
❑ 2
❑ 6
❑ 3 ◆
Allowed List Access

Restriction
❑ Outward Restrict ◆
❑ Unrestricted
❑ Toll Restrict
ARS Restriction Level
❑ 4
❑ 0
❑ 5
❑ 1
❑ 2
❑ 6
❑ 3◆
Allowed List Access

List NOS. (1 -8)

List Nos. (1 -8)

Disallowed List Access

List NOS. (1 -8)

◆ Factory Setting
4

Barrier Code

PBX System Form 3b
Outside Trunks — Pools
Maximum: 11 pools with up to 80 trunks per pool
Pool
Dial-Out
Code

Renumber
To

Logical
ID

Trunk
No.

Trunk Type
(Basic LS, Basic GS,
WATS, FX, etc.)

Description

Factory Settings: 70 (main), 891 (dial-in tie), 892 (automatic-in tie)
,
1

PBX System Form 3b, Continued
Pool
Dial-Out
Code

Renumber
To

Logical
ID

Trunk
No.

Trunk Type
(Basic LS, Basic GS,
WATS, FX, etc.)

Description

PBX System Form 3C
Outside Trunks – DS1 Facility (100D Module)
Module 1 Slot No.
Type of Service
❑ T1 ◆
❑ ISDN-PRI

Module 2 Slot No.
Type of Service
❑ T1 ◆
❑ ISDN-PRI

Module 3 Slot No.
Type of Service
❑ T1 ◆
❑ ISDN-PRI

Frame Format

❑ D4 ◆
❑ ESF

Suppression (Line Code)

❑ AMI-ZCS ◆
❑ B8ZS

Line Compensation
Cable Feet
❑ 1 ◆ (.6dB)
❑ 2 (1.2 dB)
❑ 3 (1.8 dB)
❑ 4 (2.4 dB)
❑ 5 (3.0 dB)

Line Compensation
Cable Feet
❑ 1 ◆ (.6dB)
❑ 2(1.2 dB)
❑ 3 (1.8 dB)
❑ 4 (2.4 dB)
❑ 5 (3.0 dB)

Line Compensation
Cable Feet
❑ 1 ◆ (.6dB)
❑ 2(1.2 dB)
❑ 3(1.8 dB)
❑ 4 (2.4 dB)
❑ 5 (3.0 dB)

Clock Synchronization
Priority
❑ Primary ◆
❑ Secondary
❑ Tertiary
❑ None
Source
❑ Loop ◆
❑ Local
Activation
❑ Active ◆
❑ Not Active

Clock Synchronization
Priority
❑ Primary
❑ Secondary
❑ Tertiary
❑ None
Source
❑ Loop ◆
❑ Local
Activation
❑ Active ◆
❑ Not Active

Signaling Mode

❑ RBS ◆
❑ CCS

Channel Service Unit

❑ Foreign Exchange ◆
❑ Special Access

◆ Factory Setting

PBX System Form 3c, Continued

This page intentionally left blank

PBX System Form 3c, Continued
Module

ISDN-Facility Options

Slot NO.
Telephone Number to Send
(up to 12 digits)

Telephone Number
(up to 12 digits)

Logical ID Trunk No.

Test Telephone Number (up to 12 digits)
Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEl)
❑0◆
1 -63)
❑ (
Timers and Counters

Change To

Factory Setting
T200Timer
T203Timer
N200 Counter
N201 Counter
K Counter
T303 Timer
T305 Timer
T308 Timer
T309Timer
T310 Timer
T313 Timer
T316 Timer
◆ Factory Setting

I
1

I
I

1 second
30seconds
3 transmissions
260 octets
7 frames
4 seconds
4 seconds
4 seconds
90 seconds
10 seconds
4 seconds
120 seconds

(1000-3000ms)
(1-60 seconds)
(1 -5 transmissions)
(16-260 octets)
(1-15frames)
(4-12 seconds)
(4-30 seconds
(4-1 2 seconds
(30-120 seconds)
(2-10 seconds)
(4-12 seconds)
(3-1 20 second’s)
3

PBX System Form 3c, Continued

Page _____of

B- Channel Groups
Maximum: 69 groups with up to 23 channels per group. Make copy for each group.
Group No. (1 -69)
Group No. (1 -69)
Trunks

B-Channel
lot and Port No,

Logical ID

Trunk No.

Trunks

B-Channel

Slot & Port

Logical

Trunk No.

PBX System Form 3c, Continued

General Business Systems T1/ISDN-PRI Planner
Reference No.
Customer
❉ Name

Tel. No.

❉ Address
❉ AT&T DOSS Order Number
❉ Account Executive

Tel. No.

❉ Systems Consultant

Tel. No.

T1/lSDN-PRl Vendor
❉ Name
Tel,.No.

Contact
Installation
Due Date
Materials-on-Job Date
AT&T Installation Contacts
Implementor

Tel, No.

NTM Manager

Tel. No.

NTSC Engineer

Tel. No.

DSO Manager

Tel. No.

Has order been placed with the network provider for this service’?

❑ Yes, Date

❑ No

❉ Required fields for presale.

PBX System Form 3c, Continued
❉ MODULE 1
Service Ordered or Planned
❑ ISDN-PRI
❑ T1

Line Coding (Suppression)
❑ B8ZS-Required for ISDN-PRI.
❑ AMI-ZCS

Frame Format
❑ ESF - Preferred.
Required for ISDN-PRI and
international data transmission,

Line Signaling Mode
❑ Common Channel - Required for ISDN-PRI.
❑ Robbed Bit

❑ D4 - May be used if required by local
telephone company.

Synchronization Timing
❑ Loop-Required for ISDN-PRI.
❑ Local

❉ MODULE 2
Line Coding (Suppression)
❑ B8ZS - Required for ISDN-PRI.
❑ AMI-ZCS

Service Ordered or Planned
❑ ISDN-PRI
❑ T1
Frame Format

Line Signaling Mode
❑ Common Channel - Required for ISDN-PRI.
❑ Robbed Bit

❑ ESF - Preferred.
Required for ISDN-PRI and
international data transmission.

Synchronization Timing

❑ D4 - Maybe used if required by local
telephone company.

❑ Loop-Required for ISDN-PRI.
❑ Local

❉ MODULE 3
Line Coding (Suppression)
❑ B8ZS - Required for ISDN-PRI.
❑ AMI-ZCS

Service Ordered or Planned
❑ ISDN-PRI
❑ T1
Frame Format

Line Signaling Mode
❑ Common Channel - Required for ISDN-PRI.
❑ Robbed Bit

❑ ESF - Preferred.
Required for ISDN-PRI and
international data transmission.

Synchronization Timing

❑ D4 - May be used if required by local
telephone company.

❑ Loop-Required for ISDN-PRI.
❑ Local

❉ All fields required for presale.
.
6

PBX System Form 3c, Continued
Network Planning Map

PBX System Form 3c, Continued

This page intentionally left blank

Page____ of

PBX System Form 3c, Continued
Non-Complex Configuration
Module ____of____ Slot No.
❉ Services
CHANNELS ASSIGNED TO SERVICE
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

SUBSCRIBED TO:

❑ Ground-start

(T1 only)
❑ Loop-Start
(T1 only)
❑ Tie Trunk
T1 only)
❑ MultiQuest 900 (w/wo DNIS)
(T1 only)

❑ Megacom
(T1 or ISDN-PRI)

❑ Megacom 800 (w/wo DNIS)
(T1 or ISDN-PRI)

❑ Megacom/Megacom 800
ml)
❑ Software Defined Network
(T1 or ISDN-PRI)

❑ Accunet Switched Digital Service
I

(ISDN-PRI only)
❑ Other

❑ Other

1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13

2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14

1
2
13 14
1
2
13 14
1
2
13 14

3
15
3
15
3
15

4
16
4
16
4
16

5
17
5
17
5
17

6
18
6
18
6
18

7
19
7
19
7
19

8
20
8
20
8
20

9
21
9
21
9
21

12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24

10 11 12
22 23 24
10 11 12
22 23 24
10 11 12
22 23 24

ISDN-PRI Identification Service
I

❉ Will SID/ANl be used?

❑ No

❑ Yes, for

Incoming calls ❑ ANI
then
❑ SID ❑ Both.. .Prefer
Outgoing calls ❑ ANI
❑ SID ❑ SID/ANl Privacy
Note: The DNIS service is supported only on T1 services.
Channel Service Unit

❑
Mfr
Md 1
REG#
FIC

❑

❑❉

AT&T
AT&T
ESF-T1
551 -T1 L1
GI 472-1681 9-DE-N GIC 472-1 6544 -DE-N
4DN 188
4DU 158

❉ If a CSU other than the two listed AT&T models is used, AT&T will not accept the responsibility
for its installation, connection, or testing.
❉ Required fields for presale.

Page _____of

PBX System Form 3c, Continued
Non-Complex Configuration
Module _____of_____ Slot No.
❉ Services

SUBSCRIBED TO:

❑ Ground-start
(T1 only)
❑ Loop-Start
(T1 only)
❑ Tie Line
(T1 only)
❑ MultiQuest 900 (w/wo DNIS)
(T1 only)
..
❑ Megacom
(T1 or ISDN-PRI)
❑ Megacom 800 (w/wo DNIS)
(T1 or lSDN-PRl)
❑ Megacom/Megacom 800
(T1 )
❑ Software Defined Network
T1 or lSDN-PRl)
❑ Accunet Switched Digital Service
(lSDN-PRl only)
❑ Other
I

❑ Other

1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13

2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14

3
15
3
15
3
15
3
15
3
15
3
15
3
15
3
15

CHANNELS ASSIGNED TO SERVICE
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
18
19
20
21
22
16 17
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
16 17 18 19 20 21 22

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
13 14 15 16 17 18 19

8
9
20 21
8
9
20 21
8
9
20 21

10
22
10
22
10
22

11
23
11
23
11
23
11
23
11
23
11
23
11
23
11
23

12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24

11
23
11
23
11
23

12
24
12
24
12
24

lSDN-PRl Identification Service
❉ WillSID/ANlbe used?

❑ No

❑ Yes, for

then
Incoming calls ❑ ANI
❑ SID ❑ Both.. Prefer
Outgoing calls ❑ ANI
❑ SID ❑ SID/ANI Privacy
Note: The DNIS service is supported only on T1 services.
Channel Service Unit

❑
Mfr
Md1
REG#
FIC

❑

❑❉

AT&T
AT&T
ESF-T1
551-T1 L1
GI472-16819-DE-N GIC472-16544-DE-N
4DU 158
4DN 188

❉ If a CSU other than the two listed AT&T models is used, AT&.T will not accept the responsibility
for its installation, connection, or testing.
❉ Required fields for presale.

PBX System Form 3c, Continued
Non-Complex Configuration
Module _____of_____ Slot No.
i Services

SUBSCRIBED TO:

❑ Ground-start
(T1 only)

❑ Loop-Start
(T1 only)

❑ Tie Trunk
(T1 only)
❑ MultiQuest 900 (w/wo DNIS)
(T1 only)

❑ Megacom
(T1 or lSDN-PRl)

❑ Megacom 800 (w/wo DNIS)
(T1 or ISDN-PRI)

❑ Megacom/Megacom 800
(T1
. )
❑ Software Defined Network
(11 or ISDN-PRI)

❑ Accunet Switched Digital Service
(lSDN-PRl only)

❑

Other

❑ Other

1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13
1
13

2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14

1
2
13 14
1
2
13 14
1
2
13 14

CHANNELS ASSIGNED TO SERVICE
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
9 10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10 11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

I
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24

ISDN-PRI Identification Service
❉ Will SID/ANl be used?

❑ No

❑ Yes, for

then
Incoming calls ❑ ANl
❑ ISID ❑ Both... Prefer
❑ SID ❑ SID/ANI Privacy
Outgoing calls ❑ ANI
Note: The DNIS service is supported only on T1 services.
Channel Service Unit

❑
Mfr
Md 1
REG#
FIC

AT&T
551-T1 L1
GI 472-16819-DE-N
4DU 158

❑

❑ ❉

AT&T
ESF-T1
GIC472-16544-DE-N
4DN 188

❉ If a CSU other than the two listed AT&T models is used, AT&T will not accept the responsibility
for its installation, connection, or testing.
❉ Required fields for presale.
11

PBX System Form 3d

Outside Trunks — Tie

PBX System Form 3d, Continued

Page _____of_____

PBX System Form 3e

Outside Trunks — DID
Make copies for each block
Block Number (1 or 2)
Type

Add Digits

❑ Wink-start ◆
❑ Immediate-start

❑ 0 digits ◆
❑ Add these digits
(any number from 1 - 9999)

Expected Digits
❑ 1
❑ 2
❑ 3◆
❑ 4

Signaling

❑ Rotary ◆
❑ Touch-tone
Invalid Destination

❑ Send to backup position ◆
❑ Return to fast busy

Delete Digits
❑ 0◆
❑ 1
❑ 2
❑ 3
❑ 4
Trunks Included in Block
Trunk
Number

Logical
ID

◆ Factory Setting

Telephone
Number

Disconnect Time
500 ms ◆

Other

PBX System Form 3e, Continued

Page _____of_____

PBX System Form 4a
Analog Multiline Telephone
(Make a copy of this form for each telephone.)
Logical ID

Person or Location
Button Diagram

Extension No.

Station Jack Pair
❑ Voice Announce to Busy (voice/voice)
❑ Simultaneous Voice and Data
(voice/data)
Even-numbered jack
Ext. No.
Logical ID
Telephone Model
❑ BIS-22D
❑ MLC-5
❑ BIS-34
❑ BIS-10
❑ BIS-34D
❑ BIS-22
❑ Other
Adiuncts
❑ General Purpose Adapter
❑ Fax machine
❑ Answering machine
❑ Data terminal
❑ Other
❑ Supplemental Alert Adapter
Alert device type
❑ Headset
❑ Headset adapter
❑ Hands-free unit
❑ Hearing-impaired handset
❑ Noisy environment
❑ Other

Optional Features
Pool Dial-Out Code Restriction
❑ Yes, dial-out codes

Call Restriction
❑ Unrestricted ◆
❑ Outward Restrict
❑ Toll Restrict
Forced Account Code Entry

❑ No ◆
❑ Yes
◆ Factory Setting

Remote Call Forward
❑ Not allowed ◆
❑ Allowed
Principal User of Personal Line
Trunk No. (801- 880)
Tel. No.

Individual Coverage Receivers
Primary receivers

Secondary receivers

Message-Waiting Receiver

❑ Fax machine at
Extension No.

Group Coverage
❑ No ◆
❑ Group No.
Facility Restriction Level

❑ 3◆
❑ _____(0 - 2, 4 - 6)
1

Page _____of_____

PBX Svstem Form 4b
Digital/ISDN (MLX) Telephone
Make a copy of this form for each telephone.
Logical ID
Telephone Model

Person or Location

Extension No.

❑ MLX-20L
❑ MLX-28D™
❑ MLX-10D™
❑ MLX-10
TM

Adjuncts
❑ Headset
❑ Hearing-impaired handset
❑ Noisy environment
❑ Multi-Function Module (MFM) Extension No.
❑ Fax machine
❑ Answering machine
❑ Data terminal
❑ Alert device, type
❑ Other

Optional Features
Pool Dial-Out Code Restriction

Microphone Operation

❑ Yes, dial-out codes

❑ Enable ◆
❑ Disable

Call Restriction
❑ Unrestricted ◆
❑ Outward Restrict
❑ Toll Restrict
Forced Account Code Entry
❑ No ◆
❑ Yes
Button Diagram

Remote Call Forward
❑ Not allowed ◆
❑ Allowed
Principal User of Personal Line
Trunk No. (801 - 880)
Tel. No.
Message-Waiting Receiver
❑ Fax machine at
Ext. No.

Individual Coverage Receivers
Primary receivers

Secondary receivers

Group Coverage
❑ No ◆
❑ Group No.
Facility Restriction Level
❑ 3◆
❑ _____(0 - 2, 4 - 6)

◆ Factory Setting
1

Page _____of_____

PBX System Form 4b, Continued
MFM Adjunct
Extension No.
Adjuncts

Person or Location
Button Diagram

❑ Fax machine
❑ Answering machine
❑ Used as delay announcement
device for calling groups
Ext. No.
—
—
—
.
—
—
.
.
❑ Data terminal
❑ Alert device, type
❑ Used as Calls-in-Queue Alarm
device for calling groups
Ext. No.
❑ Other

SA Orig.
Only

SA Voice

SA Ring

Optional Features
Pool Dial-Out Code Restriction
❑ Yes, dial-out codes

Call Restriction
❑ Unrestricted ◆
❑ Outward Restrict
❑ Toll Restrict
(If designated as delay
announcement, outward restrict)

Centralized Programming Requirements

❑ Disable Voice Announce
❑ Change button 2 assignment to System
Access Originate Only and remove button 3
assignment
❑ Enable Ringing/Idle Line Preference
❑ Change Automatic Line Selection order to:
(1) System Access Ring, (2) System Access
Originate Only, (3) outside trunks assigned to
buttons 3 through 10
❑ Set Ringing Option to No Ring for each
personal line on which calls are not received

Forced Account Code Entry

❑ No ◆
❑ Yes

Principal User of Personal Line

Fax Machine Features
Fax Machine Receiver
❑ No ◆
❑ Extension No.
Fax Message Threshold
❑ 10 seconds ◆
❑
seconds (0 - 9, 11- 30)

Trunk No. (801 - 880)
Tel. No.

Facility Restrictional Level

Remote Call Forward

❑ Not allowed ◆
❑ Allowed

❑ 3◆
❑ ____(O-2,4-6)

◆ Factory Setting
2

PBX System Form 4C
Tip/Ring Equipment
Make a copy of this form for each device
Logical ID

Extension No.

Person or Location
Button Diagram

Type

❑ Single-line telephone
❑ Answering machine
❑ Used as delay announcement
device for calling groups
Ext. No.

❑ Fax machine
❑ Other

Adjuncts

❑ Speakerphone
❑ Hearing-impaired handset
❑ Noisy environment
Optional Features

SA Ring

Pool Dial-Out Code Restriction
❑ Yes, dial-out codes
Fax Machine Features
Fax Message Receiver
Call Restriction
❑ Unrestricted ◆
❑ Outward Restrict
❑ Toll Restrict
(If designated as delay
announcement, outward restrict)

❑ No ◆
❑ Ext. No.
Fax Message Threshold

❑ 10 seconds ◆
seconds (0 - 9, 11- 30)
❑
Individual Coverage Receivers

Forced Account Code Entry
❑ No ◆
❑ Yes

Primary receivers

Remote Call Forward
❑ Not allowed ◆
❑ Allowed

Secondary receivers

Principal User of Personal Line
Trunk No. (801 - 880)
Tel. No.

Message-Waiting Receiver
❑ Fax machine at
Ext. No.
Facility Restriction Level

❑ 3◆
❑

(0-2,4-6)

◆ Factory Setting

Page _____of_____

PBX System Form 5a
Direct-Line Console (DLC) — Analog
Make a copy of this form for each telephone
Logical ID

Person or Location

Extension No.

Optional Features

Station Jack Pair

❑ Voice Announce to Busy (voice/voice)
❑ Simultaneous Voice and Data (voice/data)
Even-numbered jack
Ext. No.
Logical ID
Console Model

❑ MERLIN II System Display Console
❑ BIS-34D
❑ BIS-34
❑ BIS-22
Adjuncts

❑ General Purpose Adapter
❑ Fax machine
❑ Answering machine
❑ Data terminal
❑ Other
❑ Supplemental Station Alert Adapter
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑

Alert Device type
Headset
Headset adapter
Hearing-impaired handset
Noisy environment
Other

Call Restriction

❑ Unrestricted ◆
❑ Outward Restrict
❑ Toll Restrict
Forced Account Code Entry
❑ No ◆
❑ Yes
Remote Call Forward
❑ Not allowed ◆
❑ Allowed
Principal User of Personal Line
Line Number (801 -880)
Telephone No.
Message-Waiting Receiver
❑ Fax machine at Ext. No.
Individual Coverage Receivers
Primary receivers

Secondary receivers

Group Coverage
❑ No ◆
❑ Group No.
Extension Status
❑ No ◆
❑ Yes
Facility Restriction Level
❑ 3◆
(0 - 2,4-6)
❑

See back for button diagram
◆ Factory Setting

PBX System Form 5a, Continued

Assignment of outside trunks to console buttons begins with button number 3.
2

Page _____of_____

PBX System Form 5b
Direct-Line Console (DLC) — Digital/ISDN
Make a copy of this form for each console.
Extension No.
Logical ID

Person or Location

Console Model

Optional Features

❑ MIX-20L™
❑ MLX-28D™

Pool Dial-Out Code Restriction
❑ Yes, dial-out codes

Adjuncts
❑ Direct Station Selector
Number (1 or 2)
❑ Multi-Function Module
(MFM) Extension No.

❑ Fax machine
❑ Answering machine
❑ Data terminal
❑ Alert device
Type
❑ Other
❑ Headset
❑ Hearing-impaired handset
❑ Noisy environment

Individual Coverage Receivers
Primary receivers
Call Restriction

❑ Unrestricted+
❑ Outward Restrict
❑ Toll Restrict

Secondary receivers

Forced Account Code Entry

❑ No ◆
❑ Yes
Microphone Operation

❑ Enable ◆
❑ Disable
Remote Call Forward
❑ Not allowed ◆
❑ Allowed
Principal User of Personal Line
Trunk No. (801 - 880)

Button Diagram

Message-Waiting Receiver
❑ Fax machine at
Ext. No.

Group Coverage

❑ No ◆
❑ Group No
Extension Status

❑ No ◆
❑ Yes
Facility Restriction Level
❑ 3◆
❑ _____(0 - 2, 4 - 6)

Tel.No.

Assignment of outside trunks to console buttons begins with button number 6.
◆ Factory Setting
1

Page _____of_____

PBX System Form 5b, Continued
MFM Adjunct
Extension No.

Person or Location

Adiuncts

❑ Fax machine
❑ Answering machine
❑ Used as delay announcement
device for calling groups
Ext. No.

❑ Data terminal
❑ Alert device, type
❑ Used as Calls-in-Queue Alarm
device for calling groups
Ext. No.
❑ Other
Optional Features

SA Orig.
Only

SA Voice

Pool Dial-Out Code Restriction
Yes, dial-out codes
SA Ring
Call Restriction

❑ Unrestricted ◆
❑ Outward Restrict
❑ Toll Restrict
(If designated as delay
announcement, outward restrict)
Forced Account Code Entry

❑ No ◆
❑ Yes
Remote Call Forward

❑ Not allowed ◆
❑ Allowed
Principal User of Personal Line
Trunk No. (801 - 880)
Tel. No.
Fax Machine Features
Fax Machine Receiver
❑ No ◆
❑ Extension No.
Fax Message Threshold
❑ 10 seconds ◆
seconds (0 - 9, 11- 30)
❑
Facility Restrictional Level
❑ 3◆
❑
(0 - 2, 4 - 6)
◆ Factory Setting
2

Centralized Programming Requirements

❑ Disable Voice Announce
❑ Change button 2 assignment to System
Access Originate Only and remove button 3
assignment
❑ Enable Ringing/Idle Line Preference ❑ Change Automatic Line Selection order to: (1)
System Access Ring, (2) System Access Originate Only, (3) outside trunks assigned to buttons
3 through 10
❑ Set Ringing Option to No Ring for each
personal line on which calls are not received.

Page _____of_____

PBX System Form 5C
Queued Call Console (QCC)
Make a copy of this form for each telephone.
Logical ID

Extension No.

Person or Location:

Adjuncts

❑ Direct station selector
❑ Number (1 or 2)
❑ Headset
❑ Hearing-impaired handset
❑ Noisy environment
Message Center Operator

❑ No
❑ Yes
Optional Features

Microphone Operation

Pool Dial-Out Code Restriction
❑ Yes, dial-out code

❑ Enable ◆
❑ Disable

Call Restriction

Message-Waiting Indication
Receiver
❑ Fax machine at Ext. No.

❑ Unrestricted ◆
❑ Outward Restrict
❑ Toll Restrict

Extension Status
❑ No ◆
❑ Yes

Forced Account Code Entry

Facility Restriction Level

❑ No ◆
❑ Yes
Button Diagram

◆ Factory Setting
1

PBX System Form 6a
Optional Operator Features
Direct-Line Console
DLC Automatic Hold
❑ Disable ◆
❑ Enable

Operator Hold Timer
❑ 60 seconds ◆
seconds (10 - 59, 61 - 255)
❑
Queued Call Console

Message Center
❑ No
❑ Operator Extension No.

Hold Return

❑ Remain on hold ◆
❑ Return to queue
Automatic Hold or Release

Extended Call Completion

❑ Automatic Release+
❑ Automatic Hold

❑ Automatic completion ◆
❑ Manual completion

Queue Over Threshold
❑ 0 calls ◆ (operators not
notified when calls are in queue)
calls (1- 99)
❑

❑ 4 rings ◆
rings (1- 15)
❑

Elevate Priority
❑ 0 seconds ◆ (calls are not
automatically reprioritized)
seconds (5 - 30)
❑

Position Busy Backup
❑ No ◆
❑ Extension no. of calling
group backup

Calls-in-Queue Alert
❑ Disable ◆
❑ Enable, Operator Extension No.

Operator Hold Timer
❑ 60 seconds ◆
❑
seconds (10 - 59, 61 - 255)

Return Ring

QCC Queue
Priority Level
(4 ◆ )

QCC Operator to Receive Calls

Call Types
Dial O
Call Follow/Forward

N/A
I

Unassigned DID
Listed Directory Number
QCC Extension
Returning

I
N/A

◆ Factory Setting

PBX System Form 6a, Continued

Call Types, Continued
Group Coverage Calls

Group
No.

QCC Operator to Receive
Calls

QCC Queue
Priority Level Group
(4 ◆ )
No.

QCC Queue
Priority Level
(4 ◆ )

QCC Operator to Receive
Calls

Direct Station Selector
Page Buttons
f

Page Button

Beginning extension for range
Enter first extension number for range of 50 (1 DSS ) or 100(2 DSSs ) extensions for each Page button.

Call Park Codes
Factory-Set
Extension No.

Factory-Set
Extension No.

881

885

882

886

883

887

884

888

◆ Factory Setting
2

Renumber To

Page _____of_____

PBX System Form 6b
Call Pickup Groups
Maximum 30 groups. Make additional copies if more than 8 groups are assigned.

Group Number

Group ID

Ext. No

Person or Location

Ext, No.

Group Number

Group ID

Ext. No.

Person or Location

Ext. No.

Person or Location

PBX System Form 6b, Continued

Group Number

Group ID

Ext. No.

Perosn or Location

Group Number
Group ID
Ext.No.

Ext.No.

Person or Location

Group Number
Group ID
Person or Location

Ext.No.

Person or Location

PBX System Form 6C
Group Paging

Group No. 1
Group ID
Factory-Set Ext.No. 793
Renumber to
Ext.No. Person or Location

Group No. 2
Group ID
Factory-Set Ext.No. 794 Renumber to

Group No. 3
Group ID
Factory-Set Ext.No. 795 Renumber to

Group No. 4 Group ID
Factory-Set Ext.No. 796 Renumber to

Ext.No.

Person or Location

Group No. 5
Group ID
Factory-Set Ext.No. 797 Renumber to
Ext.No.

Person or Location

Ext.No.

Person or Location

Group No. 6
Group ID
Factory-Set Ext.No. 798 Renumber to
Ext.No.

Person or Location

Group No. 7
Page All
Factory-SetExt.No. 799 Renumber to

Page _____of_____

PBX System Form 6d
Group Coverage
Maximum: 30 groups. Make additional copies if more than 8 groups are assigned.
Delayed Ring Interval

Coverage Delay Interval

❑ 2 rings ◆
rings (1, 3 - 6)
❑

❑ 3 rings ◆
rings (1 - 2, 4 - 9)
❑
Group No.

Group No.

Sender

Extension Nos.

Group No.
Sender

Extension Nos.

I
I

Receivers*
Extension Nos.

QCC queue

Receivers*
Extension Nos.

QCC queue

Receivers*
Extension Nos.

QCC queue

Receivers*
Extension Nos.

QCC queue

❉ A maximum of 8 multiline telephones can be used as receivers. The QCC queue can also be receiver, but
it is not counted in the 8 receiver maximum, If a calling group is the receiver,” it must be the only receiver for
a coverage group.
◆ Factory Setting
1

Page _____of _____

PBX System Form 6d, Continued

Group No.

Sender

Extension Nos.

Receivers*
Extension Nos.

Recievers*
Extension Nos.

Receivers*
Extension Nos.

QCC queue

❉ A maximum of 8 multiline telephones can be used as receivers. The QCC queue can also be a receiver,
but il is not counted in the 8 receiver maximum. If a calling group is the receiver, it must be the only
receiver for a coverage group.

Page _____of_____

PBX System Form 6e
Group Calling
Maximum: 32 groups. (Make a copy of this form for each group.)
Group No. (1- 32)

Group ID
Renumber To

Factory-Set Ext. No.
Stations
Ext.
No.

Person or
Location

Ext.
No.

Person or
Location

Ext.
No.

Person or
Location

Ext.
No.

Person or
Location

Trunks
Logical ID

Trunk No.

Logical ID

Trunk No.

Logical ID

Trunk No.

Logical ID

Trunk No.T

PBX System Form 6e, Continued
Group No.
Group ID

Calling Group Options
Hunt Type

❑ Circular ◆
❑ Linear
Delay Announcement

❑ No ◆
❑ Extension No.
Message-Waiting Receiver

❑ No ◆
❑ Extension No..
Calls-in-Queue Alarm Threshold

❑ 1 call ◆
calls (2 - 99)
❑
External Alert for Calls-in-Queue Alarm

❑ No
❑ Extension No.
Overflow Coverage
❑ No ◆
❑ Calling Group No.
❑ QCC queue
Overflow Threshold

❑ 1 call ◆
calls (2 - 99)
❑
Group Type

❑ Auto Logout ◆
❑ Auto Login
❑ Integrated VMI
❑ Generic VMI

◆ Factory Setting
2

PBX System Form 6f
System Features

Transfer Options

Extension Status

Return Time Interval

❑ Assign to operator positions

❑ 4 rings ◆
❑ 0 rings
rings (1 - 3, 5 - 9)
❑
One-Touch Call Handling
❑ One-Touch Transfer ◆

❑ Automatic Completion ◆
❑ Manual Completion
❑ One-Touch Hold
Transfer Audible
❑ Music-on-Hold ◆

❑ Ringback
Type of Transfer
❑ Ring button ◆

❑ Voice button

❑ Group Calling/CMS ◆
❑ Hotel
SMDR Options
Call Report Format
❑ Basic ◆

❑ ISDN
Call Length

❑ 40 seconds ◆
seconds (0 - 39, 41 - 255)
❑
Calls Reported
❑ Incoming and outgoing ◆

❑ Outgoing only

Camp-On Return Time

❑ 90 seconds ◆
seconds (30 - 89, 91 - 300)
❑

Inside Dial Tone

❑ Inside ◆
❑ Outside

Call Park Return Time

❑ 180 seconds ◆
seconds (30 - 179, 181 - 300)
❑

Reminder Service Cancel -

❑ No
❑

time of day

Automatic Callback Interval

Calls to Unassigned Extensions

❑ 3 rings ◆
rings (1- 2, 4 - 6)
❑

❑
❑
❑
❑

QCC, Ext. No.
Primary Operator ◆
Another extension, Ext. No.
Calling Group, Ext. No.

Note: If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted matierial, you may be required to
obtain a copyright license from, and pay license fees to, a third party such as the American Society of
Composers, Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI). Or you can purchase
a Magic on Hold system, which does not require you to obtain such a license, from AT&T or an authorized
representative.
◆ Factory Setting

PBX System Form 6g
Allowed Lists

List 1

Allow To
Ext.Nos.

List 2

Allow To
Ext.Nos.

List 3

Allow To
Ext.Nos.

List 4

Allow To
Ext.No.

PBX System Form 6g, Continued

List 5

Allow To
Ext.Nos.

List 6

Allow To
Ext.Nos.

List 7

Allow To
Ext.No.

List 8

Allow To
Ext.Nos.

PBX System Form 6h
Disallowed Lists

List 3

List 2

List 1

Disallow To
Ext. Nos.

PBX System Form 6h, Continued

Disallow To
Ext.Nos.

List 6

List 5

List 4

Disallow To
Ext.Nos.

PBX System Form 6h, Continued

List 7

Disallow To
Ext. Nos.

List 8

Disallow To
Ext.Nos.

PBX System Form 7a
Night Service — Group Assignment
Operator Ext. No.
Ext.
No.

Name

Operator Ext. No.
Ext.
No.

Name

Operator Ext. No.
Ext.
No.

Name

Operator Ext. No.
Ext.
No.

Name

PBX System Form 7a, Continued
Operator Ext. No.
Ext.
No,

Name

Operator Ext. No.
Ext.
No.

Name

Operator Ext. No.
Ext.
No,

Name

Operator Ext. No.
Ext.
No.

Name

PBX System Form 7b
Night Service — Outward Restriction

(To keep your password private, do not fill in the blank.)

Password

Emergency Allowed List
Item
No.

Telephone No. (12 digits maximum)

Item
No.

Telephone No. (12 digits maximum)

Exclusion List (Telephones not restricted during Night Service)

Ext. No.

Name

Ext. No.

Name

Ext. No. I

Name

PBX System Form 7b, Continued
Exclusion List (Telephones not restricted during Night Service)

Ext. No.

Name

Ext. No.

Name

Ext. No.

Name

PBX System Form 7C
Night Service — Time Set
Start

D a y
Sunday

(0)

Monday

(1)

Time*

Stop

Time*

Tuesday (2)
Wednesday (3)
Thursday (4)
Friday

(5)

Saturday (6)
* Hours and minutes in 24-hour (military) time

PBX System Form 8a
Label Form — Trunks
Trunk No.
801
802
808
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840

Label (7 characters maximum)

Trunk No.

Label (7 characters maximum)

841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
1

PBX System Form 8b
Label Form — Stations and Calling Groups
Ext.
No.

Label
(7 characters maximum)

Ext.
No.

Label
(7 characters maximum)

Ext.
No.

Label
(7 characters maximum)

PBX System Form 8b, Continued
I

Ext.
No.

Label
(7 characters maximum)

Ext.
No.

Label
(7 characters maximum)

Ext.
No.

Label
(7 characters maximum)

PBX System Form 8C
Label Form — Posted Message
Message
No.

Label (16 characters Maximum)

Revised Standard Message

PBX System Form 8d

PBX System Form 8d, Continued

PBX System Form 9a

Automatic Route Selection Worksheet
Number of exchanges in your calling area

Trunk Pool No.

Trunk Type

Type of Dial *

Number of Area Codes or Exchanges
for which Trunk Pool is Used

* T = Toll, L = Local
Preferred trunk pool for toll calls Table 17)
Preferred trunk pool for local calls (Table 18)

Page _____ of_____

PBX System Form 9b
Automatic Route Selection Tables
Maximum: 16 Tables. Make copy for each table.

Table No.
Type of Table

❑
❑
❑
❑

6-Digit
Area Code
Exchange
1 + 7, dialing from
❑ not within area code ◆
❑ within area code

Area Code/Exchanges

041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060

021
022

001

002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015

033
034
035

016

036

017
018
019
020

037

023
024
025
026
027
028
029

030
031
032

038
039

040

Subpattern B Time of Day

Subpattern A Time of Day

Pool
1
_

FRL ◆
—

Other Digits

081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
- 096
097
098
099
100

061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080

Absorb
1

Pool
1

FRL ◆
_
—

Other Digits

Absorb
1

—

◆ Factory setting
FRL setting is 3.
1

Page _____ of_____

PBX System Form 9b, Continued

Table No.
Type of Table

❑
❑
❑
❑

6-Digit
Area Code
Exchange
1 + 7, dialing from
❑ not within area code ◆
❑ within area code

Area Code/Exchanges

041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054 — . . —
055
056
057
058
059
060

021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020

FRL ◆
_
—

Other Digits

066
067

068
069

070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
Subpattern B Time of Day

Subpattern A Time of Day

Pool
1

081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100

061
062
063
064
065

Absorb
1

Pool
1 _

FRL ◆
—

Other Digits

Absorb
1

—

● Factory setting.
FRL setting is 3.

PBX System Form 9C

Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables
Table 17: Default Toll Table
Subpattern B Time of Day

Subpattern A Time of Day

Pool

FRL ◆ Other Digits

Absorb Pool

FRL ◆ Other Digits

Absorb

1 —

2 —

4 —

Table 18: Default Local Table
Subpattern A Time of Day

Pool

FRL ◆ Other Digits

Subpattern B Time of Day

Absorb pool

FRL ◆

Other Digits

Absorb

1 —

2 —

3 —

4 —

5 —

6 —

Table 19: Dial O

Pool

FRL ◆ Other Digits

Table 20: N11 (411 611, 811, 911)

Pool*

FRL ◆ Other Digits

◆ Factory setting for FRL is 3.

* Always set to first pool in system, cannot be changed.

Index

line jack type, 3-2

A
0
0 (zero)
and Allowed List toll restrictions, 4-34
O(zero)
fixed dial code, 2-20
008 MLX module
capacity, 2-4
station jack type, 2-13
008 module
capacity, 2-4
station jack type, 2-13
008 OPT module
calling group delay announcement on, 4-23
capacity, 2-4
connecting equipment and applications to, 2-19
logical IDs on, 2-7
Remote Access on, 3-11
station jack type, 2-13
012 module
calling group delay announcement on, 4-23
capacity, 2-4
connecting equipment and applications to, 2-19
Remote Access on, 3-11
station jack type, 2-13
012 modules
limitations of older, 2-19
1 + 7 Tables for ARS, 4-46
100D module
capacity, 2-4
line jack type, 3-2
logical IDs on, 2-7
400 EM module
line jack type, 3-2
400 GS/LS/lTR module
line jack type, 3-2
Remote Access on, 3-11
400 module
line jack type, 3-2
Remote Access on, 3-11
408 GS/LS module
line jack type, 3-2
station jack type, 2-13
408 module
line jack type, 3-2
station jack type, 2-13
6-Digit Tables for ARS, 4-44
800 DID module
Remote Access on, 3-11
800 GS/LS module
line jack type, 3-2
800 module
capacity, 2-4

Account Code Entry, Forced, 4-3
Accunet Switched Digital Service, 3-18
Add digits for DID trunks, 3-41
Adding to the system, 5-2
Adjunct-extension numbers, 2-21, 2-23 , 2-25
Adjuncts, trunk assignment to, 3-47
Alarm Threshold, calling group Calls-in-Queue, 4-24
Alert, external
for Maintenance Alarm, 3-6
types of, 1-4
Alert, external for Calls-in-Queue Alarm, 4-24
Alert, QCC Calls-in-Queue, 4-9
Allowed Lists, 4-33
Call Restrictions and, 4-2
class of restriction and, 3-13
Night Service Emergency, 4-37
Alternate mark inversion zero code suppression, 3-20
AMI-ZCS. See alternate mark inversion zero code
suppression.
Analog data station, 1-3
Analog multiline telephones
station jack pairs for, 2-16
station jacks for, 2-18
trunk assignment to, 3-44
types of, 1-3
Analog station jacks, 2-13
AN I. See AT&T INF02 automatic number identification
service.
Answer supervision time for tie trunk, 3-38
Answering machines
station jack for, 2-19
trunk assignment to, 3-46
Applications
list of, 1-4
maximum number per module, 2-19
station jacks for, 2-19
Area Code Tables for ARS, 4-45
ARS. See Automatic Route Selection.
AT&T INF02 automatic number identification service
SMDR Call Report Format and, 4-31
AT&T INF02 automatic number identification service and
outside trunk labels, 4-38
PRI telephone number to send, 3-26
Audible, Transfer, 4-28
AUDIX Voice Power — IS II, station jack for, 2-19
Auto Dial buttons
and One-Touch Transfer, 4-27
Auto Dial buttons and
Extension Status, 4-30
Auto login/logout setting for calling group, 4-26
Automatic Callback, 4-29
Remote Access eligibility for, 3-11
Automatic Completion
One-Touch Transfer, 4-27

IN-1

Index
QCC Extended Call, 4-10
Automatic Hold
DLC, 4-6
QCC, 4-7
Automatic-in tie trunk pooling, 3-14
Automatic Maintenance Busy, 2-11
Automatic Number Identification service, 3-18
Automatic Release for QCC, 4-7
Automatic Route Selection, 4-41
line button assignment and, 3-47
Automatic tie trunk
QCC queue priority, 3-10
Automatic-start tie trunk, 3-37
Auxiliary equipment, trunk jacks for, 3-5
AVP. See AUDIX Voice Power — IS Il.

B
B-channel groups
with PRI facilities, 3-29
B-channel groups with PRI facilities
telephone number and, 3-25
test telephone number and, 3-26
B8ZC. See Bipolar 8 zero substitution.
Backboard composition and dimensions, 1-6
Backup clock synchronization, 3-22
Backup (overflow) coverage for a calling group, 4-25
Backup On button on QCC, 3-10
Backup, QCC Position Busy, 4-10
Barrier codes, Remote Access, 3-14
Basic carrier
dimensions, 1-6
sample diagram of, 2-8
Basic telephone. See sing/e-/ine te/ephone.
Basic telephone station jack, 2-13
Behind Switch mode, 2-10
Bipolar 8 zero substitution, 3-20

C
Call Accounting System
SMDR and, 4-31
Call Completion, QCC Extended, 4-10
Call Forward, Remote, 4-3
Call Forward with Remote Access, 3-11
Call Length option with SMDR, 4-31
Call Management System
auto Iogin for, 4-26
extension number assignment to, 2-21 , 2-23 , 2-26
Extension Status configuration for, 4-30
module used to connect, 2-13
station jacks for, 2-15

IN-2

Call Park
codes, 4-13
Return Time, 4-29
Call pickup groups, 4-14
Call Report Format option with SMDR, 4-31
Call Restrictions, 4-2
Call types, directing calls to QCC by, 4-11
Callback, Automatic, 4-29
Remote Access eligibility for, 3-11
Calling group. See Group Ca//ing.
as receiver for Group Coverage, 4-18
delay announcement, 4-23
explanation of, 4-20
labeling, 4-38
redirecting calls to, 4-32
Calls Reported option with SMDR, 4-31
Calls-in-Queue Alarm Threshold, calling group
external alert for, 4-24
Calls-in-Queue Alarm Threshold for calling group, 4-24
Calls-in-Queue Alert, QCC, 4-8
Camp-On Return Time, 4-29
Canadian Department of Communications
notification, viii
Capacity, trunk and station, 2-5
Capacity, module, 2-4
Carrier, basic and expansion
definition of, 1-3
dimensions, 1-6
sample diagram of, 2-8
CAS. See Call Accounting System.
Channel service unit
explanation of, 3-16
Line compensation and, 3-21
T1 emulation and, 3-24
zero code suppression and, 3-20
Circular Hunt Type for calling groups, 4-22
Class of restriction, Remote Access, 3-13
Clock synchronization for DS1 facility, 3-22
CMS. See Call Management System.
Common-channel signaling, 3-24
Communication Survey, Employee
form, 1-8
sample analysis of, 1-10
Components, system, 1-1
Connecting
stations, 2-19
stations, 2-13
trunks, 3-1, 3-6
Console. See direct-line console, queued call console and
system programming console.
Control unit
definition of, 1-3
environmental requirements for, 1-5
module placement in, 2-6
sample diagram of, 2-8
Control Unit Space Requirements for, 1-6
Counters, PRI timers and, 3-27

Index
Cover button
Individual, 4-16
Cover buttons
Group, 4-18
Cover Delay interval, 4-18
Coverage, 4-16
CSU. See channe/ service unit.

D
D4 framing format, 3-20
Data stations, definition, 1-3, 1-4
Date and time, system, 2-11
Dedicated Remote Access, 3-12
Default tables for ARS, 4-45
Delay announcement, calling group, 4-23
Delay interval, Cover, 4-18
Delay-start tie trunk, 3-37
Delayed Ring Interval, 4-19
Delete digits on DID trunks, 3-40
Dial
mode for tie trunk, 3-38
tone, inside (system internal), 4-32
Dial-in tie trunk
pooling, 3-14
QCC queue priority, 3-10
Dial-in tie trunks
Remote Access number for, 3-12
Dial-It Nova. See MultiQuest.
Dial-out code, Pool, 4-2
Dialed Number Identification, 3-17
Dialed Number Identification Service
and tie trunk signaling, 3-37
Dialing requirements
ARS, 4-40
Toll Prefix, 3-8
Dial tone
for tie trunk, 3-38
DID. See Direct Inward Dial.
Digit absorption for ARS, 4-49
Digital data stations, 1-4
Digital services on the DS1 facility, 3-17
Digital Signal 1 facility, 3-16 , 3-35
Digital station jacks, 2-13
Digital/lSDN (MLX) telephones
microphone operation on, 4-3
station jacks for, 2-17
trunk assignment to, 3-47
types of, 1-4
Digits on DID trunks
add, 3-41
delete, 3-40
expected, 3-40
Direct Inward Dial trunks, 3-39
and pooling, 3-14

Remote Access for, 3-12
Direct-line console
Automatic Hold, 4-6
Extension Status lights on, 4-30
line button assignment to, 3-48
maximum numbers of, 2-15
Operator Hold Timer, 4-6
Remote Access trunks on, 3-11
station jack for, 2-14
trunk assignment to, 3-48
Direct Station Selector
Call Park codes on, 4-13
definition of, 1-3
One-Touch Transfer for, 4-27
one-touch use of Group Calling, 4-21
one-touch use of Group Paging, 4-15
Page buttons on, 4-12
Direction of tie trunk, 3-36
Directory labeling
Extension (station), 4-38
System, 4-45
Disallowed Lists, 4-34
Call Restrictions and, 4-3
class of restriction and, 3-13
Disconnect interval. See Hold and direct-line console.
Disconnect reliability, loop-start
Hold Disconnect and, 3-9
Disconnect reliability, loop-start trunk, 3-7
Disconnect time
DID trunks, 3-42
tie trunk, 3-38
DLC Automatic Hold, 4-6
DNIS. See Dialed Number Identification Service.
DOC Notification, viii
DS1. See Digital Signal 1 facility.
DSS. See Direct Station Selector.

E
E&M signal
for tie trunk, 3-37
Elevate priority of QCC queue calls, 4-8
Emergency Allowed List, 4-34
Emergency Allowed List, Night Service, 4-37
Employee Communication Survey
form, 1-8
sample analysis of, 1-10
Environmental requirements for control unit, 1-5
ESF. See extended superframe format.
Exchange Tables for ARS, 4-44
Exclusion List, Night Service, 4-37
Expansion carrier
dimensions, 1-6
sample diagram of, 2-8
Expected digits on DID trunks, 3-40

IN-3

Index
Extended Call Completion, QCC, 4-10
Extended superframe format, 3-20
Extension Directory labeling, 4-38
Extension numbers
and assigning DID trunk blocks, 3-42
relationship to Logical IDs, 2-12
renumbering, 2-20
Extension Status, 4-36
External alert
for Calls-in-Queue Alarm, 4-24
trunk jack for, 3-6
types of, 1-4

Group Assignment for Night Service, 4-36
Group Calling, 4-20
configuration for Extension Status, 4-30
Group Cover buttons, 4-18
Group Coverage, 4-17
QCC Message Center and, 4-9
Group Paging, 4-15
Group Type, calling group, 4-26
GS. See ground-start.
GS/LS. See ground-start/loop-start.

H
F
Facility Restriction level, 4-49
Factory setting. See specific trunk or feature entry.
Fax, 1-4
Message Threshold, 4-4
station jack for, 2-19
trunk assignment to, 3-46
Features
group assigned, 4-14
operator, 4-6
system, 4-27
telephone, 4-1
Fixed dial code, 2-20
Floor Plan
creating, 1-11
sample, 1-12
updating, 2-26
Forced Account Code Entry, 4-3
Foreign exchange (FX)
trunk pooling, 3-14
trunks, connecting, 3-4
Foreign exchange CSU setting, 3-24
Forms Checklist and Index, xiv
Frame format for DS1 facility, 3-19
FRL. See Facility Restriction /eve/.
FX. See foreign exchange.

G
General Purpose Adapter, 1-3
Generic VMI. setting for calling group, 4-26
GPA. See Genera/Purpose Adapter.
Ground-start trunk pooling, 3-14
Ground-start/loop-start line jacks, 3-2
Group assigned features, 4-14
call pickup groups, 4-14
Coverage, 4-16
Group Calling, 4-20
Group Paging, 4-15

IN-4

Hold
DLC Automatic, 4-7
One-Touch, 4-27
QCC Automatic, 4-7
Hold Disconnect, 3-9
Hold Return, QCC, 4-7
Hold Timer
DLC Operator, 4-6
QCC Operator, 4-11
Hotel configuration for Extension Status, 4-30
Hunt Type for calling group, 4-22
Hybrid/PBX mode, 2-10

I
Immediate-start
DID trunks, 3-40
tie trunk, 3-37
In-band signaling, 3-24
individual Coverage, 4-16
Inmode for tie trunk, 3-38
Inside dial tone, 4-32
Integrated VMI. setting for calling group, 4-26
Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant — IS II, station
jack for, 2-19
Interval
Automatic Callback, 4-29
Coverage Delay, 4-19
Delayed Ring, 4-19
Hold Disconnect, 3-9
Transfer Return, 4-27
Invalid destination, calls to, 3-41
invalid destinations, DID trunk calls to, 4-9
ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) See digital/ISDN
(MLX) telephones and Digital Signal 1 facility.
lVP-AA. See Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant
—IS Il.

Index

J
Jacks
logical IDs for trunk and station, 2-6
power failure transfer, 2-3
primary operator position, 2-14
programming, 2-9
type of station, 2-4 , 2-13
type of trunk, 2-4
types of line, 3-2

K
Key mode, 2-10

L
Labeling, 4-38
Large processor module, 2-1
Line buttons, 3-44
Line coding for DS1 facility, 3-20
Line compensation
for DS1 facility, 3-21
Line connections, 3-6
Linear Hunt Type for calling groups, 4-22
Local clock reference source, 3-22
Local setting for tie-trunk dial tone, 3-38
Logical IDs, 2-6
relationship to extension numbers, 2-12
Login/logout, calling group auto, 4-26
Long Hold Disconnect interval, 3-9
Loop clock reference source, 3-22
Loop-start
disconnect reliability, 3-7
jacks, 3-2
trunk pool, 3-14
Loudspeaker Paging
button, 3-45
description, 1-4
trunk jack for, 3-5
LS. See loop-start.

M
Main pool, 3-14
Maintenance Alarm
trunk jack for, 3-6

Maintenance Busy, Automatic, 2-11
Manual completion
One-Touch Transfer, 4-27
QCC Extended Call, 4-10
Megacom, 3-17
MERLIN Attendant
for calling group, 4-21
station jack for, 2-19
MERLIN LEGEND System Programming and Maintenance,
jack for, 2-9
MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System
specifying disconnect reliability for, 3-7
station jack for, 2-19
Message Center, QCC, 4-9
Message Waiting Receiver
calling group, 4-23
fax, 4-4
MFM. See Multifunction Module.
Microphone operation of telephones, 4-3
MLC-5 cordless telephone, 1-3
MLX. See digital/ASDN (MLX) telephones.
Mode
DS1 signaling, 3-24
tie-trunk dial, 3-38
Mode of operation, 2-10
Modules
capacities of, 2-4
placement, 2-6
power supply, 1-3 , 2-1
processor, 2-1
trunk and station, 1-3, 2-1
types of, 2-1
Multi-Function Module, 1-4
Multiline telephones
analog, 1-3
line button assignment to, 3-44
station jacks for+, 2-17, 2-18 MultiQuest, 3-19
Music-on-Hold
Transfer Audible with, 4-28
trunk jack for, 3-5

N
Network Planning Map’ of DS1 facilities; on page 7 of Form
3c. Describe the entire network of DS1 facilities by
summarizing the following for each 100D module, 3-34
Night Service, 4-36
and Shared Remote Access, 3-12
Non-complex configuration of DS1 facilities, 3-33
Number Identification service. See AT&T //VF02 automatic
number identification service.
Numbering, system, 2-12 , 2-26

IN-5

Index

Off-premises telephone, 1-4
station jack for, 2-19
One-Touch
Hold, 4-27
Transfer, 4-27
Operator features
Direct Station Selector, 4-13
direct-line console, 4-6
queued call console, 4-7
Operator Hold Timer
DLC, 4-6
QCC, 4-11
Operator position telephones, 2-15
Operator positions, station jacks for, 2-14 , 2-15
OPT. See off-premises telephone.
OPX. See off-premises telephone.
Ordering discussion for DS1 facilities, 3-35
Other digits for ARS, 4-49
Out-of-band signaling, 3-24
Outmode for tie trunk, 3-38
Outside trunk dial tone, 4-32
Outward restriction
and calling group delay announcement, 4-23
for Night Service, 4-36
Overflow Coverage for calling group, 4-25

Pool
button, 3-45
dial-out codes, 3-15
Pool dial-out code, 4-2
Pools, 3-14
Position Busy Backup for QCC, 4-10
Posted Message labeling, 4-39
Power failure transfer jacks, 2-3
Power failure transfer jacks and logical IDs, 2-7
Power supply module, 1-3
definition, 2-1
placement in control unit, 2-6
PRI. See Primary Rate Interface.
Primary Individual Coverage, 4-16
Primary operator position
types of, 2-14
Primary operator position, station jack for, 2-3
Primary Rate Interface facility, 3-25
designating DS1 facility as, 3-17
digital services on, 3-17
Principal user of personal line
and Coverage, 4-16
Principal user of personal line and Remote Call Forward, 4-4
Priority
elevate QCC queue call, 4-8
QCC queue, 3-10
Processor module
placement in control unit, 2-6
types of, 2-1
Programming equipment, 2-9

Page buttons on Direct Station Selector, 4-12
Paging groups, 4-15
Paging, Loudspeaker
description, 1-4
trunk jack for, 3-5
Password
Night Service, 4-37
Remote Access, 3-11
PBX mode, Hybrid/, 2-10
PC. See personal computer.
Personal computer with MERLIN LEGEND System
Programming and Maintenance, 2-9
Personal Line
and Coverage, 4-17
button, 3-44
Remote Call Forward and, 4-4
PFT. See power failure transfer.
Pickup groups, call, 4-14
Placement of modules in control unit, 2-6
Planner, T1/lSDN-PRl, 3-30

QCC Message Center, 4-9
QCC operator receiving calls, 3-9
QCC queue
as receiver for Group Coverage, 4-18
directing types of calls to, 4-11
elevate priority within, 4-8
priority, 3-10
redirecting outside calls to, 4-32
QCC. See queued call console.
Queue Over Threshold, 4-8
Queue priority
QCC, 3-10
Queue priority, QCC
elevate, 4-8
Queued call console
Backup On button on, 3-10
features, 4-7
maximum numbers of, 2-15
station jack for, 2-14

IN-6

Index

R
RBS. See robbed-bit signaling.
Receivers for Group Coverage, 4-18
Redirect calls to unassigned extension numbers, 4-32
Release button, QCC Extended Call Completion and, 4-10
Release, QCC Automatic, 4-7
Reminder Service cancel, 4-32
Remote Access, 3-11
Remote Call Forward, 4-3
specifying disconnect reliability for, 3-7
Remote setting for tie-trunk dial tone, 3-38
Renumbering, system, 2-20, 2-26
Restrictions, Call, 4-2
Return
QCC Hold, 4-7
Return Interval, Transfer, 4-27
Return Ring, QCC, 4-10
Return Time
Call Park, 4-29
Camp-On, 4-29
Ring Interval, Delayed, 4-19
Ringback, 4-28
Robbed-bit signaling, 3-24
Rotary dial
mode for tie trunk, 3-38
signaling on DID trunks, 3-41
trunks, 3-8

S
SA. See System Access.
SAA. See Supplemental Alert Adapter.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS, V
SASS. See Shared Access for Switched Service.
SDN. See Software Defined Network.
Secondary Individual Coverage, 4-16
Security of Your System, xi
Seizure type for tie trunk, 3-37
Set Up Space numbering plan, 2-20,2-24
Shared Access for Switched Service, 3-17
Shared Remote Access, 3-12
Short Hold Disconnect interval, 3-9
and disconnect reliability, 3-7
SID. See Station Number Identification Service.
Signaling
DID trunk, 3-41
mode for DS1 facility, 3-24
type for tie trunk, 3-37
Simultaneous Voice and Data, 2-16
Single-line telephones
explanation of, 1-3

Small processor module, 2-1
SMDR. See Station Message Detail Recording.
Software Defined Network, 3-17
Special access CSU setting, 3-24
Special Number Tables for ARS, 4-45
SPM. See MERLIN LEGEND System Programming and
Maintenance.
Station and trunk modules
capacities, 2-4
definition, 1-3
placement in control unit, 2-6
Station jacks
analog multiline telephone, 2-18
applications, 2-19
digital/lSDN (MLX) telephones, 2-17
logical IDs for, 2-6
operator positions, 2-14
pairs of, 2-16
primary operator position, 2-14
single-line telephone, 2-19
system programming console, 2-9
tip/ring equipment, 2-19
types of, 2-13
Station labeling, 4-38
Station Message Detail Recording, 4-31
ARS digit absorption and, 4-49
set system date and time for, 2-11
Station Number Identification service, 3-20
Subpatterns for ARS, 4-49
Supplemental Alert Adapter, MFM acting as, 2-17
Survey, telephone user, 1-7, 1-10
Synchronization, DS1 clock, 3-22
System Access buttons, 3-44
how to use, 2-10
System components, 1-1
System date and time, 2-11
System Directory labeling, 4-39 System features, 4-62
Allowed Lists, 4-33
Automatic Callback, 4-29
Automatic Route Selection, 440
Call Park Return Time, 4-29
Camp-On Return Time, 4-29
Disallowed Lists, 4-34
Extension status, 4-30
inside dial tone, 4-32
labeling, 4-38
Night Service, 4-36
redirect calls to unassigned extension numbers, 4-32
Reminder Service cancel, 4-32
Station Message Detail Recording, 4-31
Transfer of calls options, 4-27
System internal inside dial tone, 4-32
System numbering, 2-12, 2-26
System programming console, station jack for, 2-9
System renumbering, 2-20 , 2-26
System Speed Dial labeling, 4-39

IN-7

Index

T
T1. See Digital Signal 1 facility.
T1/lSDN-PRl Planner, 3-30
Tables, ARS, 4-44
TDM. See time-division multiplex bus.
TEI. See terminal equipment identifier.
Telephone features, 4-1, 4-4
Call Restrictions, 4-2
Fax Message Waiting Receiver and Threshold, 4-4
Forced Account Code Entry, 4-3
microphone operation, 4-3
Pool dial-out code, 4-2
Remote Call Forward, 4-3
Telephone number for PRI facility, 3-25
Telephone number to send for PRI facility, 3-26
Telephone user survey, 1-7, 1-10
Terminal equipment identifier, 3-26
Test telephone number for PRI facility, 3-26
Three-Digit numbering plan, 2-20, 2-22
Threshold
calling group Calls-in-Queue Alarm, 4-24
Fax Message, 4-4
Tie trunks, 3-36
pooling, 3-14
Time-division multiplex bus and clock synchronization, 3-22
Time Set for Night Service, 4-37
Time, system date and, 2-11
Timer
DLC Operator Hold, 4-6
QCC Operator Hold, 4-11
Timers and counters for PRI facility, 3-27
Tip/ring equipment, station jacks for, 2-19
Tip/ring interface, MFM acting as, 2-17
Toll Fraud
preventing, xi
Toll prefix dialing requirements, 3-8
Toll Type, 3-8
Touch-tone
dial mode for tie trunk, 3-38
receivers, modules with, 2-4
signaling on DID trunks, 3-41
T/R. See tip/ring.
Transfer Audible, 4-28
Transfer button versus One-Touch Transfer, 4-27
Transfer of calls options, 4-27
Transfer Return Interval, 4-27
Trunk and station capacity, 2-4
Trunk and station modules
capacities, 2-5
definition of, 1-3
placement in control unit, 2-6

IN-8

Trunk assignment
DLC, 3-48
telephones, 3-43
Trunk assignment to DLCs, 3-48
Trunk connections, 3-1
Trunk jacks
coding, 3-3
logical IDs for, 2-6
types of, 3-1
Trunk labeling, 4-38
Trunk options
DID trunks, 3-39
DS1 facility (100D module), 3-16
Hold Disconnect, 3-9
loop-start disconnect reliability, 3-7
Pools, 3-14
Primary Rate Interface facility, 3-25
QCC operator receiving call, 3-9
Remote Access, 3-11
rotary dial trunks, 3-8
T1/lSDN-PRl Planner, 3-30
tie trunks, 3-36
Toll type, 3-8
TTR. See touch-tone receiver.
Two-Digit numbering plan, 2-20
Type
calling group, 4-26
DID trunk, 3-40
DS1 facility, 3-17
Toll, 3-8
Transfer, 4-28

U
Unassigned extension numbers, redirect calls to, 4-32
User survey, telephone, 1-7, 1-10

V
Voice Announce to Busy, 2-16
Voice/data station jack pair, 2-16
Voice/voice station jack pair, 2-16

W
Warranty, xi
WATS trunks, connecting, 3-4
Wink-start
DID trunks, 3-40
tie trunk, 3-37

Index

Z
ZCS. See alternate mark inversion zero code suppression.

IN-9

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 264
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Creation Date                   : 1996:09:09 23:54:57Z
Producer                        : Acrobat PDFWriter 2.01 for Windows
Author                          : EZ Manuals
Keywords                        : 
Subject                         : 
Mod Date                        : 2002:01:09 08:54:59-06:00
Create Date                     : 1996:09:09 23:54:57Z
Modify Date                     : 2002:01:09 08:54:59-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2002:01:09 08:54:59-06:00
Title                           : dna6392.tmp
Creator                         : EZ Manuals
Description                     :

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Dna6392.tmp Merlin Legend R1 PBX System Planning

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation